Skip to main content

Full text of "Antarctic adventure and research"

See other formats


: App i LA JON 


NE EW. Wor. bp OF SCIENCE SERIES 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE 
AND RESEARCH 


/ QAR ASIAAN A 


GRIFPITH TAYLOR 


> 
o> 
3% 
x 
ah 
¢ 
a 
a 
Ge 
23 
3 8 
3 & 
oer 
0. 


Princeton, New Jersey 


@ Pee 


TU 


2s00 TOE0 


MUNIN 


IOHM/18l 


wl 


— 


APPLETON NEW WORLD OF SCIENCE SERIES 
EDITED BY WATSON DAVIS 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE 
AND RESEARCH 


By GRIFFITH TAYLOR 


A. GEOGRAPHY 


AUSTRALIA, PHYSIOGRAPHIC AND ECONOMIC (4th EDITION). 
OXFORD, 1928. 

A GEOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALASIA. OXFORD, 1914. 

*NEW SOUTH WALES. MELBOURNE, 1912. 

*THE GEOGRAPHICAL LABORATORY. SYDNEY, 1925. 

*WALL-ATLAS OF AUSTRALIAN MAPS. OXFORD, 1929. 


B. METEOROLOGY, etc. 


*CLIMATE AND WEATHER OF AUSTRALIA. MELBOURNE, 1913. 

AUSTRALIAN ENVIRONMENT. (GOVERNMENT PRINTER) MEL- 
BOURNE, 1918. 

AUSTRALIAN METEOROLOGY. OXFORD, 1920. 


C. ANTARCTICA 


WITH SCOTT—THE SILVER LINING. LON®ON, 1916. 

PHYSIOGRAPHY OF MacMURDO SOUND.: (HARRISON) LONDON, 
1922. 

*HINTS TO SCIENTIFIC TRAVELERS (Vol. FV). THE “HAGUE, 1926, 

ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH. NEW YORK, 1930. 


D. PALEONTOLOGY 
THE ARCHEOCYATHINAE (CAMBRIAN CORALS). ADELAIDE, 1910. 


7 


E. ETHNOLOGY 


ENVIRONMENT AND RACE. OXFORD, 1927. 
, * Joint Author. 


’ a 
Fs 


=P 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE ~ 
AND RESEARCH 


Jot f 
GRIFFITH TAYLOR 
D.Sc.; B.E. (SypNEy); B.A. (CAMBRIDGE) 


PROFESSOR OF GEOGRAPHY AT THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO 


ae or 


ILLUSTRATED 


D. APPLETON AND COMPANY 
NEW YORK 1930 LONDON 


JRA TFA 


COPYRIGHT, 1930, BY 
D. APPLETON & COMPANY 


PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA 


PREFACE 


NevER has so much interest been taken in Antarctic 
exploration as at present. Three major expeditions, 
those of Byrd, Wilkins and Mawson, are still in the 
field (early in 1930). Norwegians are flying from 
whalers and charting new coasts (near Enderby Land) 
whose longitude has not been published. Thanks 
iargely to the kindness of Dr. Bowman and Mr. Joerg 
of the American Geographical Society, this small book 
will be found to be up to date at the time the proof 
was corrected. The splendid Antarctic maps recently 
published by the same Society have been referred to 
repeatedly in this book—as also have recent articles 
dealing with the same area. The writer has also bor- 
rowed data with due acknowledgment from the Jour- 
nal of the Royal Geographical Society which has al- 
ways welcomed the records of Antarctic explorers. 
Lastly, John Murray has kindly permitted me to use 
one or two diagrams from my book “With Scott— 
The Silver Lining.” Although I can not altogether 
agree with his taste, the Editor of the series expressly 
asked for my own somewhat rough diagrams and 
sketches. So I hope that those readers who prefer 
something more artistic will blame the right man! 

As regards the chapters dealing with research, they 
are concerned largely with work in the Ross Sea area 

Vv 


PREFACE 


of Antarctica. Some readers may feel that other re- 
gions have been somewhat neglected, but I think that 
if the whole body of Antarctic literature be examined 
it will be found to deal very dominantly with this 
sector, i.e., that behind the coasts explored by Ross, 
Scott, Shackleton, Mawson, Byrd, and others. Almost 
all branches of science have been studied as regards 
their Antarctic aspects more fully in this sector than 
in any other. Moreover, it is the region with which 
I have personal acquaintance. 

If this book gives the reader some conception of the 
last great unknown area of the earth it will have accom- 
plished its purpose. 

i ae 
University of Chicago. 


CONTENTS 


PREFACE - : - : - : : . . . : 


CHAPTER 


1? 


bi 


THE VALUE OF ANTARCTIC EXPLORATION 
EXPLORING ANTARCTIC SEAS 


EXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


Ve RECENT EXPEDITIONS TO. THE ANTARCTIC 
V:. THE CONTINENT, ITS GEQLOGY AND-EELA- 
TION, TO OTHER LANDS 

VE.) SCENERY AND) TOPOGEAPEY : . . 
Vil. ICE SHEETS AND GLACIERS-~ : ° ° . 
VIII. OCEANOGRAPHY AND SEA-ICE . ° ° . 
IX. CLIMATOLOGY : : : : . . . 

me BLORA AND FAUNA 

xt. COMMERCIAL AND POLITICAL ASPECTS 
REFERENCES ° ° : ° . : . . . ° 
iN DEX” is ° ° . . . . . . : ° 


PAGE 


FIGURE 


T.. 


By 


ame 


2a. 


Se 


FO: 


RY. 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


Relative areas of Antarctica, Europe and 
Australia, also Texas . 

Sketch map showing lines of af Geenene 
variation in South Victoria Land 

Mercator’s world-map, 1587 . . 

Cook’s explorations (1772-1775) of ee 
arctic seas . 

Chart showing Aeecie icone oh 
dates 

Voyages in ae Aniacemes a D’Urville, 
Wilkes and Ross... 

Map of South Victoria fad Php oan, 

Chart of the Weddell Sea (incorporating 
Wilkin’s discoveries) . 

Map of MacMurdo Sound, eine oes 
of the author’s parties in ae the 
four great outlet glaciers . 

Symmetry of the World about an axis 2, 
epeiogenic (en masse) uplift, from Ant- 
arctica through Africa to Greenland (on 
Mollweide Equal Area Projection with 
Antarctica added) 

Generalized diagram illustrating if alien 
features in the “build’’ of Antarctica and 
adjacent continents 

Geological sections across acces 

ix 


PAGE 


54 


85 


88 
QI 


FIGURE 
2. 


‘13. 
14. 


£5: 


16. 


17. 


18. 


19. 
20. 


al. 


27) 
7. 


24. 


ILLUS#E RATIONS 


Gomphocephalus, the largest animal of Ant- 
arctica. Archeocyathus, the oldest fossil 
in Antarctica, where dwarf forms, a few 
millimeters wide, occur 

Plan and section of Taylor Valley showing 
two riegel . 

Deébris-cones between Brehie ine aie 
the sea-ice, near Cape Evans . hae 

Block diagram showing the ice-free Taylor 
Valley, 18 miles long, and the ice divide 
between the Taylor and Ferrar glaciers 

Sections illustrating the evolution of the 
riegel in Taylor Valley . Ame 

Block diagrams illustrating the “palimpsest 
theory” of glacier erosion applied to the 
Royal Society Range . 

Diagram showing positions of ihe layer & 
maximum nie at present, and in the 
Pleistocene. Pleiocene conditions are 
merely suggested . 

Sketches illustrating the classiateeen uf 
glaciers ; 
The Herbertson Glacies pressing into the 

Ferrar Glacier on the left . a (8 

A vertical section through “confluent ice” 
and Drygalski Tongue. Vertical section 
along front face of Ross Ice Shelf, look- 
ing north ; 

Bathymetric maps of Bast Anancies 

Vertical section of ocean north of Gauss- 
berg, showing stratification of water 

Block diagram of Granite Harbor . 

x 


PAGE 


96 
II2 


118 


123 


125 


128 


149 


155 
159 


161 
167 


FIGURE 


25. 
26. 


a7. 


33: 


34. 


I[ELUSTRATIONS 


Variations in width of pack ice off Queen 
Mary Land 

Summer and winter temperatures in eae 
tic and Arctic regions eee eesiaait 

Atmospheric circulation in the southern 
hernisphere south of the trade wind belt, 
according to the “Polar front’ theory, 
showing the belt of lows surrounding the 
er cyclone 

Mean monthly temperatures a eat ne 
tralian and Antarctic stations 

The glacial anticyclone : 

Probable isobars at sea level and A 3, 000 
meters 

The biological cycle i in the cede 

Emperor penguin and chick; also Adelie 
penguins pondering, ecstatic and tobog- 
ganing . 

Map of South ee ae dieprinution 
of whale food . 

Map illustrating nomenclature aie a 
annexations 


Xi 


PAGE 


172 


180 


182 


CHAPTER I 
THE VALUE OF ANTARCTIC EXPLORATION 


T has been some years now since it was my fortune 
I to be a member of one of the greatest expeditions 
which set forth to explore the regions around the South 
Pole. Over and over again I have been asked, ““What is 
the use of polar exploration?’ It seems advisable, 
therefore, to consider this aspect of the problem, for 
assuredly readers who see no value in the subject of 
a book will not be tempted to read far beyond the first 
page. 

It has been customary for promoters of a new ex- 
pedition to dwell largely on the “quick returns” which 
may accrue from exploring an unknown land. Some 
good Antarctic friends of my own have, in this con- 
nection, stressed the fact that Alaska was bought for a 
song, when its resources were almost unknown, and 
that its gold yield has made it a very profitable invest- 
ment for the United States. Subconsciously, I fancy, 
the hesitating supporter thinks, “Well, Alaska is a 
mighty cold place; so is Antarctica. Why shouldn’t the 
expedition find a second Yukon near the South Pole?’ 
Personally, I don’t believe that this method of angling 
for support does much good. The hard-headed busi- 
ness man soon learns that hardly a single mineral prod- 
uct and certainly no vegetable products of present value 

E 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


have been discovered in the Antarctic,’ and that the 
chances are against such being discovered in the rela- 
tively small areas of rock which are not covered deep 
beneath the Antarctic ice cap. But he gallantly sub- 


Fic. I.—RELATIVE AREAS OF ANTARCTICA, EUROPE AND 
AUSTRALIA (BROKEN LINE), ALSO TEXAS. 
(Note: The United States is the same size as Australia.) 


scribes to help on the cause of exploration. Why? 
Because other considerations beyond mere pounds, shil- 
lings and pence appeal to his pocket. 

To my mind there are two very real reasons for 
which such expeditions should appeal to any intelligent 
man or woman. There is first of all the fundamental 


1 The inaccessible coal fields and the whaling will be dis- 
cussed later. 


2 


Tae VALUE OF ANTARCTIC EXPLORATION 


“appeal of the unknown.” Our lonely little planet is, 
so far as we know, the only habitat of sentient beings 
of the human type. There are nearly two thousand 
million of us clustered on the fifty million square miles 
of the better-known continents. Surely it is the duty 
of man to learn all he can with regard to this great 
new continent of Antarctica, which is certainly not the 
least in area, for it is larger than Australia and quite 
probably larger than the whole of Europe. A fair 
estimate for the area of Antarctica is four and one- 
half million square miles—while these other continents 
are decidedly smaller.” 

The world has been educated to revere astronomical 
research, and governments feel it part of their duty to 
support public observatories for the study of far dis- 
tant stars. I hope for a time when the larger nations 
of the world will look nearer home and subsidize work 
on this very large segment of their own planet, whose 
study would repay them equally well in the advance of 
scientific knowledge. No scientist ever needs to be con- 
verted to a belief in the value of Antarctic exploration. 
There is hardly a branch of science which is not await- 
ing help from data to be studied properly only in the 
inaccessible lands of high latitudes. But since the lay- 
man is naturally not so familiar with these fundamental 
problems of science as he is with the more practical 
problems of applied knowledge, it will perhaps not be 
out of place for me briefly to traverse this aspect of 
Antarctic research. 


2 Australia has an area of three million, and Europe of three 
and nine-tenths million square miles. 


3 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Let us first of all consider one of the chief problems 
of navigation. This science hinges very largely on the 
magnetic compass and on the distribution of the lines 
of magnetic force over the earth’s surface. In almost 
every part of the globe there is a notable difference 
between the direction of the magnetic needle and the 
true north-south line (which is, of course, indicated by 
the meridian), and it is often stated that Columbus 
first noted this declination during his earliest voyage to 
America. Humboldt, about the year 1800, was the first 
to chart the lines of magnetic force over any large area 
of the world. In 1831 Sir James Ross observed that 
a freely suspended magnet dipped 89° 50’ (i.e. it was 
practically vertical) in Boothia Land (70° 5’ N.) on 
the north coast of Canada. This is the North Mag- 
netic Pole and is situated 1,400 miles from the true 
North Pole. All the lines of equal declination (or 
variation from the true meridian) converge at this 
point. 

The most fruitful Antarctic expedition resulted di- 
rectly from this discovery, for in 1840 Sir James Ross 
was dispatched by the British Government to the un- 
known Antarctic regions precisely to advance our 
knowledge of magnetism. His chief aims were to set 
up magnetic observatories at St. Helena, Kerguelen, 
and Tasmania, and then if possible to plant the same 
flag on the South Magnetic Pole that he had set up in 
the north. As we shall see, he was blocked by the 
giant mountains of the Admiralty Range, but proceed- 
ing south he traversed the Ross Sea, far surpassed the 
previous southern record, and reached what has proved 


4 


Glacier 
| 


\ 
! 
| 
\ 
’ 
) 
} 
’ 
! 
' 
U 
| 


Fic. 2—SKETCH MAP SHOWING LINES OF EQUAL MAG- 
NETIC VARIATION IN SOUTH VICTORIA LAND. 


Inset is Glossopteris, a Permian fern from the Beardmore 
Glacier. (From map by American Geographical Society, 1929.) 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


to be the most fruitful area of Antarctic research. It 
was left to Scott in 1903 to be the first to cross that 
interesting line (at the head of the Taylor Glacier) 
joining the South Magnetic and South poles. This 
is the line of 180° variation and along it the south-seek- 
ing end of the needle points due north. In 1909 David 
reached the South Magnetic Pole, where the magnetic 
needle dipped vertically, and so he paralleled Ross in 
the north. This interesting locality is some one thou-: 
sand two hundred miles from the true South Pole. 
Another field of science for which a polar environ- 
ment is essential is the determination of the shape of 
the earth. Owing to the polar “flattening,” the effect 
of gravity is greater at the poles than at the equator. 
In fact a piece of lead tested on a spring balance would 
be found to be one half of one per cent heavier at the 
poles. This variation in the pull of gravity is of course 
measured by the swing of a pendulum at the required 
localities, and an accuracy of one part in two hundred 
and fifty thousand was attainable in the Antarctic. 
Special interest attaches to the very abundant auroral 
displays in polar areas. These are found to be con- 
nected with sunspot phenomena and with magnetic 
storms. In North Polar regions the maximum zone 
for auroral displays passes close to the North Mag- 
netic Pole, but we have not enough data to plot their 
distribution accurately in southern regions. Dr. Chree 
expressed the opinion that if they are due to electrical 
discharges from the sun, then these are probably of 
daily or hourly occurrence. As such, it is clear that 
Antarctica is a specially valuable area for their study. 


6 


THE VALUE OF ANTARCTIC EXPLORATION 


Perhaps in the field of meteorology lies the most 
practical application of data obtainable only in the 
Antarctic. Sir Hubert Wilkins is carrying out his 
reconnaissance surveys in the south primarily with a 
view to finding localities suitable for a chain of 
meteorological stations all around the Antarctic con- 
tinent. The layman knows that the general surface 
circulation of the atmosphere is from the colder regions 
toward the equator, and back again at higher levels. 
But it is only since Scott’s discovery in 1902 that 
Antarctica is a gigantic ice-covered plateau that 
meteorologists have appreciated the special localized 
action of the phenomena at the South Pole. (There 
is, for instance, nothing of the kind at the North Pole, 
and indeed the meteorological pole in the Northern 
Hemisphere is to be placed in northeast, Siberia rather 
than in the deep ocean at the Pole itself.) We may 
picture the poleward-flowing streams sinking to the 
earth at the intensely cold elevated South Pole and 
thence streaming out, either with moderate speed or as 
furious blizzards, back again to temperate regions. 
Indeed the phenomena in the heart of the Antarctic 
may be compared to an organic “heart,’’ which pumps 
the streams back again to revivify regions of vital 
importance to man. In a later section I hope to show 
how closely linked are the climatic changes of Antarc- 
tica with those of the southern continents, so that it is 
not too much to say that the future long-range fore- 
casting of droughts in south temperate lands will be 
greatly helped by increased knowledge of Antarctic 
meteorology. 


7 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Turning now to fields of natural science, there is 
much of vital interest which can only be elucidated in 
Antarctica. Many of the problems in southern zodlogy 
turn on the paths followed by animals in the past in 
_ reaching the three southern continents. Broadly speak- 
ing, there are two schools of thought. One believes 
that all the vertebrates reached the southern continents 
by migration from the more extensive lands to the 
north, in most cases from Eurasia. The other school 
believes that Antarctica served as a sort of “half-way 
house” whence animals could spread by vanished 
“land-bridges” to South America, to South Africa, to 
Australia, and to New Zealand. To quote R. C. 
Murphy, “The real proof would be forthcoming only 
through the discovery of marsupials or other pertinent 
material in fossiliferous beds of Antarctica.’’ We shall 
see that wonderful fossils, both of plants and animals, 
have been discovered in South Victoria Land and in 
Graham Land, which also throw a flood of light on the 
fascinating problem of past climates. 

As regards plants, there are so few in the Antarctic 
that the botanical problems are not so interesting as 
those of zodlogy. No flowering plants occur there, 
but it is very curious that half the Antarctic lichens and 
thirty per cent of the mosses occur also in the Arctic 
regions and have not yet been found in the low latitudes 
between. } 

It is generally known that the regions now inhabited 
by the most progressive peoples were covered with a 
series of enormous ice fields in the last (Pleistocene) 
epoch. This occurred many thousand years ago, but 


8 


THe VALUE OF ANTARCTIC EXPLORATION 


the later phases were contemporaneous with important 
human populations. Moreover, the effects of the ice 
ages concern practically every dweller in the United 
States, in Canada, in Britain, and in north and central 
Europe. For instance, the environments of the 
Canadian wheat fields, the Great Lakes, the rivers and 
canals and scenery of the northeastern United States, 
the whole topography of Alpine countries, the routes 
of the transcontinental railways in Europe, the actual 
settlement in the deep valleys of Switzerland—all these 
features depend almost entirely on the phenomena of 
the Great Ice Age. We cannot now study what these 
lands were like during the period of maximum glacia- 
tion, but it was an attempt to solve in part this set of 
problems which led the writer to become a member of 
the British Antarctic Expedition of 1910. For sev- 
eral years he had been investigating the post-glacial 
scenery of the European Alps, but here it is very dif- 
ficult to decide how much of the scenery is due to past 
ice action and how much to the action of rivers and 
streams of post-glacial origin. In the Antarctic I 
was so fortunate as to find ice-free valleys where all 
the features of the Swiss topography were displayed 
without the obliterating effects of many thousand years 
of rains and rivers. 

In the realm of geology there are similar reasons 
why Antarctica should be closely surveyed. The two 
regions fairly well known at present belong to two 
differing provinces. In the Australian quadrant around 
the Ross Sea the rocks and structures are quite re- 
markably like those of Australia. They consist es- 


9 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


sentially of blocks of the earth’s crust bounded by 
definite north-south fault-scarps. The eruptive rocks 
are like those of South Australia. The fossils are also 
similar. In West Antarctica (Graham Land, etc.) 
- we seem to see a continuation of the South American 
Andes. These are folded mountains occurring often 
in arcs, one of which appears to link Chile with Ant- 
arctica by way of the drowned islands of South 
Georgia, South Orkneys, etc. Here, moreover, the 
eruptive rocks belong to a different province from those 
of Victoria Land and consist of a calc-alkaline series 
of granodiorites and basalts akin to those of the 
Andes. Probably the greatest unsolved problem as re- 
gards the earth’s structure is the relation of these two 
regions to each other. Are there two Antarctic con- 
tinents, separated by straits or archipelagic areas? Or 
do the Antarctic Andes die away against an infinitely 
larger plateau of the Australian type? The latter 
seems probable, and if Antarctica as a whole is 
covered with an ice carapace, we shall probably wait 
many a long year for a satisfactory answer. 

Finally the whole problem of the general evolution 
of the earth in geological times is only to be solved by 
frequent references to polar evidence. Recent research 
has shown that in the five hundred million years of 
which geology gives us the record the earth was for 
most of the time characterized by a more uniform en- 
vironment both of topography and climate than in the 
present epoch. Plant and animal life was also more 
cosmopolitan than to-day. There was probably much 
less differentiation of those climatic zones (frigid, tem- 

IO 


THE VALUE OF ANTARCTIC EXPLORATION 


perate, torrid) which control all plant and animal life 
to-day. Obviously if this thesis is correct the decisive 
data will be found in those lands which lie around the 
poles—and of these the Antarctic lands are much the 
most extensive. It is a very remarkable fact that 
though we now have an almost complete series of 
geological formations surveyed in Antarctica, dealing 
with the whole five hundred million years of the 
geological record, there is no evidence of any extreme 
glacial climates such as we know occurred in other 
parts of the world, either in Cambrian, Silurian, or 
Permian times. There is a vague indication of glacial 
beds of early Tertiary Age, but nothing suggesting 
that the awe-inspiring ice plateau of the seventh Con- 
tinent dates back more than the last few million years 
in our long terrestrial epic. 

It is the purpose of this small book to interest the 
reader in the adventures and researches of that ex- 
tremely small number of the earth’s huge population 
who have been willing to try to prove that polar ex- 
ploration is well worth while. 


CHAPTER i 


EXPLORING ANTARCTIC SEAS 


PERIOD 1739-1774 


T is always surprising to a scientist to see how long 
I a geographical fallacy will hold ground, while an 
indubitable scientific fact of equal interest seems to 
take much longer to attract public attention. For in- 
stance, I found in Australia that few folk there know 
anything about the Sahara except the project to render 
parts of it fertile by flooding large adjacent areas, or 
of Central Australia save that since Lake Eyre is below 
sea level much might result from leading the sea into 
it. Neither of these projects is in the least advisable— 
or indeed practicable. So also in the early history of 
southern exploration there was an old legend of the 
Greeks which it took three hundred years to nullify. 
This was to the effect that a huge land must neces- 
sarily be situated south of the equator, to balance the 
known world in the northern hemisphere. Ptolemy 
lent it the weight of his authority in his remarkable 
maps of the Mediterranean and adjacent regions, and 
the cartographers of the Middle Ages adopted it very 
generally in the maps published to the end of the 
sixteenth century. 

In Figure 2a I have sketched the map as published by 
Mercator in 1587. We can see at a glance that while 

I2 


EXPLORING ANTARCTIC SEAS 


the Old and New Worlds are fairly well represented in 
latitude (north to south), there is a good deal of error 
in the east-west direction. This is of course primarily 
due to the difficulty of obtaining longitude before the 
accurate use of chronometers was possible. Hence all 
the known continents are too wide. There is no sign 
of Australia, save a huge “hump” in the hypothetical 
land which occupies so large a part of the Southern 


ang 
We 


Fic. 24.——MERCATOR’S WORLD-MAP, 1587. 


For some 300 years explorers were reducing the large ruled 
“Southern Continent” to its true size, shown in black. (True 
position of Australia and East Asia indicated. ) 


Hemisphere. The only basis for this large area was 
perhaps the view of Tierra del Fuego seen by Magel- 
lan in 1520, when his voyage around the world clearly 
showed that Ptolemy’s Terra Incognita was not joined 
to South America. Moreover, in 1578 Drake had 
been driven as far to the south of Tierra del Fuego 
as 57° and sailed through the broad strait now known 
by his name. This gap of some four hundred and fifty 
miles was apparently not known to Mercator. 


13 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


To the French must be given the credit for the first 
serious attempt to discover whether this southern con- 
tinent really existed. In 1739 on New Year’s Day, 
Bouvet discovered a new land which lay to the south 
of Capetown some 1,400 miles (see Figure 3). Ow- 
ing to fog, he was unable to state if it were an island 
or part of a large continent, but he sailed along the 
edge of the ice pack in the vicinity for some four 
hundred miles, feeling sure that a large continent 
existed just to the south. Antarctica, however, lay 
still one thousand miles south of his track. It is a 
noteworthy fact that the small island of Bouvet was 
thereafter lost until 1898, when the “Valdivia” found 
it eight degrees west of the original determination. 
This is another example of the relative difficulty of 
fixing longitude, for the latitude (54° S.) was approxi- 
mately correct. 

The losses of France in Canada in part led to 
Kerguelen’s voyages of 1772 and 1773 when he dis- 
covered the island (named after him) in the Indian 
Océan. in ‘latitude 50° S. (see Figure 3). Dhis agaim 
had little relationship with the Antarctic continent. 

The greatest achievement of Captain James Cook 
was not his charting of the best-endowed coast of 
Australia in 1770, but his wonderful work in delimit- 
ing the southern boundaries of the three great oceans 
in his voyages from 1772 to 1775. Cook first came 
into prominence through his charts of the Saint 
Lawrence, where he took part in the siege of Quebec. 
Some of these charts and the copy of his Australian 
log are the prized possessions of the National Museum 


14 


EX PUORING ANTARCTIC SEAS 


at Canberra, Australia, where other relics of Australian 
and Antarctic exploration are gradually being gathered. 

We may summarize his first and third voyages as 
follows. In the first he doubled Cape Horn from the 
east and observed the transit of Venus at Tahiti. He 
discovered and charted the east coasts of both New 
Zealand and Australia, and returned home through 
Torres Straits between New Guinea and Australia. He 
reached England in July, 1771. His third voyage was 
chiefly directed to the North Pacific in an attempt to 
reach the Atlantic Ocean by way of the Behring 
Straits. This has, of course, not been done to this 
day, though several ships have managed to make the 
voyage in the opposite direction, like the “Vega’’ 
(1878-9) along Siberia, and the “Gjoa” (1903-6) 
along Canada. Cook discovered many islands in the 
Pacific and surveyed much of the northwest American 
coast. He was killed at Hawaii in February, 1779. 

It was in his second voyage, however, in which he 
“put a girdle round the earth, and had enough over 
to tie the knot.’’ Dalrymple, a well-known writer of 
this period, was convinced that there existed a great 
continent around the South Pole. He wrote in a let- 
ter to the King, “That unknown part is a quarter of 
the whole globe, and so capacious that it may contain 
in it double the kingdoms and provinces of all those 
your Majesty is at present lord of.’’ Cook left Eng- 
land in July, 1772, and his first object was to survey 
Bouvet “Land.” They sighted ice on December roth 
and soon proved that Bouvet Land was not part of a 
large continent, for they sailed in open water far to 


15 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


the south. As Lieutenant Clerke wrote in his log, 
“If my friend Monsieur found any land, he has been 
confoundedly out in the latitude and longitude of it.” 


Fic. 3.—Cook’s EXPLORATIONS (1772-1775) oF ANT- 

ARCTIC SEAS ARE SHOWN RULED. A, B, C, D, E ARE 

CRUISES. THE INNER WHITE AREA SHOWS THE ANT- 

ARCTIC SEAS YET TO BE EXPLORED. CONTINENTS ARE 
BLACK. 


Alexander Is., Enderby Land and Peter Is. are indicated, while 
X shows Weddell’s furthest. 


On the seventeenth of January, 1773, the Antarctic 

Circle was crossed for the first time not far from 

Enderby Land in longitude 40° E. As far north as 
16 


PAPUORING ANTARCTIC’ SEAS 


this Circle (owing to the tilt of the earth’s axis) the 
sun shines for twenty-four continuous hours on De- 
cember 22nd, so that sunset and sunrise occur due 
south at the same instant. 

Cook now sailed to the northeast to survey the land 
of Kerguelen of which he had received a report, but 
he was again unlucky and missed this second French 
discovery. He then returned to southern latitudes and 
for four weeks sailed along latitude 60° S. (see A, 
Figure 3). On March 16th he left the Antarctic area 
and proceeded to the rendezvous with his other ship 
in New Zealand. In June he proceeded to examine 
the region east of New Zealand and sailed through an 
empty sea right across Dalrymple’s conjectured conti- 
nent (see B, Figure 3). He returned by a northern 
route to New Zealand. On the approach of summer 
Cook sailed south once more for his most remarkable 
cruise (see C, Figure 3). For six weeks his ships 
were buffeted by the storms of the “Shrieking Sixties” 
and on two occasions he crossed the Antarctic Circle. 
The first was on longitude 140° W. where, however, 
the Antarctic coast is still quite unknown. After the 
second crossing (near 106° W.) he penetrated to lati- 
tude 70°, and on January 30th, 1774, he was blocked 
by mountainous ice in a position which has not yet 
been surpassed in this region, though the ‘Pourquoi 
Pas” approached it in 1910. Thereafter he made for 
Warmer waters and returned northwest to New 
Zealand. 

On his last southern cruise (see D, Figure 3), he 
left on November toth, 1774, and sailed along lati- 


17 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE/ AND RESEARCH 


tude 56° S. for Cape>Hoern.~ Here again he’ crossed 
the supposed continent and found no land whatever. 
From the Horn he followed a course to Capetown 
far south of that usually taken. His initiative was 
rewarded by the discovery of the large rocky island 
of South Georgia, which lies on the submarine ridge 
connecting the Andes of South America to the Andes 
of West Antarctica. Somewhat to the east he sighted 
further “peaks” of the same ridge which he named 
the Sandwich Group. Then he made one more attempt 
to sight Bouvet Island, and he must have passed only 
a few miles to the south of it. After crossing his 
original track of 1772 he turned to the north and 
reached Capetown March 2ist, 1775. 

Probably no other voyage, not even excepting Magel- 
lan’s, has done so much to remove ‘“‘false lands’ from 
the world map. Cook’s first cruise in large part mapped 
the ice pack south of the Indian Ocean. His second 
main cruise did the same work for the Pacific, while 
his last cruise completed his task in the Atlantic. On 
two occasions he practically reached the Antarctic con- 
tinent, first near Enderby Land and secondly to the west 
of Peter Island. Of supreme importance also was his 
fight against scurvy, so that all his crew save one with- 
stood this scourge throughout three years of unparal- 
leled navigation. It was his misfortune to miss the 
great continent which actually surrounds the South 
Pole, for he only discovered two outlying isles off 
South America. Of these South Georgia is, however, 
the chief center of industry in Antarctic waters. The 
same cruises were, however, much more successful in 


18 


EXPLORING ANTARCTIC SEAS 


placing the islands of the South Pacific on the map, 
though that is outside of the province of this brief 
study. 


PERIOD 1775-1838 


As is so often the case in exploration, there was a 
period of quiescence after an epoch of great discovery. 
For some forty years exploration was confined chiefly 
to those seas to the south of America where the whal- 
ing industry obtained the illuminating oils of the 
period. Americans and British took part in the in- 
dustry, but there were many more American ships. 
However, a Britisher, Smith, discovered the South 
Shetland Isles in 1819, and they were surveyed by a 
British sailor, Bransfield, next year. In 1821 the 
American, Palmer, discovered the archipelago which 
hugs the west coast of Graham Land (see Figure 7), 
and next year a Britisher, Powell, found the South 
Orkneys, which lie halfway between the South Shet- 
lands and South Georgia. There has been a good deal 
of controversy as to who first discovered the actual 
mountains of Graham Land (or West Antarctica), but 
this perhaps is of less importance now that Wilkins has 
shown that this large land mass is in turn isolated from 
the main continent by Stefansson Strait (Fig. 7). 

The splendid voyages of Bellingshausen have never 
received the credit which they deserve. He was a 
Russian sailor who was commissioned by Emperor 
Alexander I in 1819 to circumnavigate the South Pole. 
His discoveries much resembled those of Cook. He 
sailed from South Georgia to the east on December 


19 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


27th. During the next few months he cruised along 
the edge of the pack, often within the Antarctic Circle. 
He was able to show that no land existed far south 
of Cook’s cruises (see A and E, Figure 3) in these 
waters. He reached Sydney at the end of March, 
1820. After a cruise in the Pacific, Bellingshausen 
again sailed south and made a wonderful voyage again 
very largely within the Antarctic Circle. On the 
twenty-second of January, 1821, he sighted Peter 
Island (see Figure 7) and a week later Alexander 
Land far tothe east (see P and A, Figure 3). Eiarly 
next month he met Palmer and other whalers near 
Graham Land, and thence returned to Russia. His 
voyage had “lopped off” the projecting unknown areas 
which Cook did not traverse; and his discovery of land 
so far south as 68° S. remained a record until the 
wonderful voyage of Ross in 1841. 

One of the most fortunate voyages in Antarctic his- 
tory was that of Captain Weddell in a brig of 160 tons. 
His main object was to hunt for seals, but finding the 
region to the south of South Georgia remarkably free 
from ice, he and his consort (a boat of 60 tons) de- 
termined to push south as far as was possible. On the 
eighteenth of February, 1823, he reached 73° S., and 
not a particle of ice was to/be seen (see isure 3), 
though they were some two hundred miles nearer the 
Pole than Cook’s record. On the twentieth he turned 
back at 74° 15’, for his ships and equipment were 
not intended for exploration. 

The famous merchants, the Enderby Brothers of 
London, encouraged the captains of their whaling fleet 

20 


EXPLORING ANTARCTIC SEAS 


* YLABiscoe 


1 a li ingshay sen 


Boundary of 
Continent 


Fic. 4—CHART SHOWING ANTARCTIC DISCOVERIES WITH 
DATES. 


Recent British discoveries are ruled or dotted. 


to attempt the exploration of new waters. In 1831 

Captain Biscoe met with very favorable conditions, so 

that he was able to sail for five weeks within the Ant- 

arctic Circle. He sailed to the east directly south of 
21 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Africa in an area which has hardly been visited since, 
though it is the venue of the present Australian 
expedition under Sir Douglas Mawson in 1929-30. 
On February 25th, 1831, when just on the circle he 
saw “‘an appearance of land” about longitude 48°, and 
for nearly three weeks Biscoe fought the pack and the 
blizzard in an attempt to reach the continent. From 
March 1st to the 8th the hurricane lasted without 
intermission; the bulwarks were stove in and several 
boats lost or broken. On the sixteenth he again saw 
the black cape projecting through the icy highlands, 
to which he gave the name Cape Ann (see Figure 4). 
To the whole coast, which seemed to extend for several 
hundred miles east and west (from 48° E. to 56° E), 
has been given the name of Enderby Land. This oc- 
casion marks the true discovery of the Antarctic con- 
tinent. He then made for Tasmania, where he was 
rejoined by his cutter, the “Lively,” whose crew had 
nearly died of starvation near the site of Melbourne 
before they could make the port of Hobart. Buiscoe 
returned to England via the southern Pacific route. 
Near the Russian discoveries he met with very open 
water and so discovered Adelaide Island to the north 
of Alexander Land. He also landed on the Palmer 
Archipelago, and the vast rocky ranges to the east were 
named Graham Land after the First Lord of the 
Admiralty. 

Another famous captain of the Badevhe whalers 
was Balleny. He sailed south from New Zealand and 
in February, 1839, he discovered the group of volcanic 
islands just on the Antarctic Circle (longitude 

22 


EXPLORING ANTARCTIC SEAS 


163° E.) which has been given his name. Some weeks 
later some one thousand five hundred miles to the west 
he saw an appearance of land in longitude 120° E. to 
which the name “Sabrina Land” was given (see Fig- 
ure 4). While this is a doubtful discovery, later voy- 
ages by Wilkes and J. K. Davis (1911) make it likely 
that land lies in just this position. 


PERIOD 1837-1843 


The first great period of Antarctic discovery resulted 
from the national expeditions commanded by Cook and 
Bellingshausen. The second notable period was also 
due to expeditions dispatched by various governments, 
in this case France, United States, and Britain. Since 
there was some rivalry between these three expeditions, 
it will be well to give in tabular form a summary of 
their voyages and discoveries. All the voyages were in 
the southern summer, usually in January and February. 

D’Urville was sent south by Louis Philippe to ex- 
plore the Weddell Sea and if possible to approach 
nearer to the South Pole than previous voyagers. His 
attempt was not very successful in this respect for he 
only reached 63° 39’ S., not far south of South 
Orkney. Then he returned to the west and sailed along 
the coast of Graham Land. He gave the names of 
Louis Philippe Land and Joinville Island to areas 
which had certainly been roughly charted by Powell 
before. However, these names have been adopted on 
all modern maps. D’Urville devoted the next two 
years to the exploration of the Pacific, especially to 
the ethnology of the primitive peoples, a work which 


23 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


appealed to him much more than Antarctic exploration. 
However, early in 1840 he decided to win for France 
the credit of reaching the South Magnetic Pole. He 
left Hobart on New Year’s Day and on January 1oth, 
1840, the first land of the continent itself was sighted 


DATE West ANTARCTICA East ANTARCTICA 


1838 D’Urville (Jan.-Feb.) off 
Graham Land. 


1839 Wilkes (Feb.) South 
Shetlands and _ near 
Peter Island. 


1840 D’Urville (Jan.) Adelie 
Land. 

Wilkes (Jan.-Feb.) Adelie 
Land and west to Ter- 
mination Land. 


1841 Ross (Jan.-Feb.) Ross Sea 
and Barrier. 


1842 Ross (Jan.-Feb.- March) 
East of Ross Sea. 


1843 Ross (Dec. ’42-Mar. ’43) 
Weddell Sea. 


due south of Tasmania, to which he gave the name 
Adelie Land (see Figure 5). ‘It stretched as far as 
the eye could see and was entirely covered with snow, 
and it might have a height of one thousand to one 
thousand two hundred meters.” Several small islands 
were seen in the vicinity and here rocks were collected, 
and the adjacent cape was called Pointe Geologie. A 


24 


EXPLORING ANTARCTIC SEAS 


dramatic meeting took place with one of Wilkes’ ships 
on the thirtieth of January, but Ringgold misunderstood 
D’Urville’s actions and sailed away without communi- 
cating with the French. About one hundred and 


joe a e ' 
wore \ 
P= - auss oe 


=a 1902 


Fic. 5.—VovyacGeEs IN East ANTARCTICA OF D’URVILLE, 
WILKES AND Ross. 


X and Y are the doubtful positions of Ringgold Knoll and 
C. Hudson. 


twenty miles to the northwest of Adelie Land the 
French leader sighted an ice barrier about one hun- 
dred feet high. To this he gave the name of Cote 
Clarie; but this ice was not part of the fired land-ice 
for it had disappeared in 1912. The French left Ant- 


25 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


arctica on February Ist, 1840, and have sent no later 
expedition into these eastern waters. 

Although the United States has taken a great in- 
terest in Arctic exploration, as was shown in the 
Franklin Relief Expeditions and later, she has not given 
much official attention to Antarctic seas and lands. Al- 
most the sole exception until the present century was 
the important expedition dispatched in 1839 under 
Commander Charles Wilkes.* His instructions were 
to survey the waters frequented by American whalers, 
and to make two summer cruises towards the South 
Pole south of America and Tasmania respectively. He 
was not equipped for lengthy Antarctic exploration. 
He sailed on the sloop “Vincennes,” together with 
three other small boats, and made two determined at- 
tacks on the unknown regions to the south. Early in 
March, 1839, they cruised among the islands at the 
north end of Graham Land and the “Porpoise’’ was 
nearly wrecked on Elephant Island, where Shackleton’s 
men were to shelter in 1916. The other two boats 
penetrated into the heavy pack west of Graham Land 
and the “Flying Fish” (of only 96 tons) reached 70°, 
near the region explored by the “Belgica” in 1808, 
where it is likely that they mistook high icebergs for 
land. In December, 1839, the ships left Sydney for 
their second Antarctic voyage. They were most poorly 
equipped, and Wilkes records that he felt it was “un- 
wise to attempt such service in ordinary cruising ves- 
sels, but we had been ordered to go, and that was 


1 Charles Wilkes, Narrative of the United States Exploring 
Expedition (London, Whittaker, 1845). 
26 


PRP LORING ANTARCTIC SHAS 


enough, and go we should.” ? On January 13th they 
approached the Balleny Islands (see Figure 5), but it 
is unlikely that they saw indications of the land for 
they were about one hundred miles away. On the six- 
teenth several officers were satisfied that land was 
visible. “The mountains could be distinctly seen 
stretching to the southwest as far as anything could 
be discerned. Two peaks in particular were very dis- 
tinct.’ Both these discoveries of the thirteenth and 
sixteenth were probably errors of judgment, for the 
“Erebus” and ‘Terror’ sailed across one “land” in 
March, 1841, and the “Discovery” found no sign of 
the other in those latitudes in 1904. Yet even here it 
may be that Wilkes saw islands like Bouvet Isle which 
will elude accurate survey for many decades. It must 
be noted that the “Aurora” in 1916 obtained very shal- 
low soundings near Wilkes’ doubtful lands. On Janu- 
ary 23rd the American expedition reached a deep bay 
(in 67° S. and 147° 30’ E.), and obtained a sounding 
at 320 fathoms. It seems likely that Wilkes was now 
between the Ninnis and Mertz Glacier tongues, which 
were mapped in detail by Mawson’s expedition in 
IgII-12. On January 30th the “Vincennes” coasted 
Adelie Land, noting the black rocks which D’Urville 
had examined only ten days before. Wilkes writes, “TI 
gave the land the name of the Antarctic Continent.” 
On the same day (January 30th) the “Porpoise’’ met 
D’Urville farther to the westward, as has been 
narrated. 


BES. Balch Antarctica Cieoe): 
27 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Wilkes was badly handicapped by crippled ships and 
the ill-health of his crew, but he stoutly held on to 
westward, and after longitude 137° E. again sailed 
along the land for sixty miles to the west. In longi- 
- tude 131° 40’ he sighted and named Cape Carr on the 
seventh, and on the tenth and twelfth he determined 
the land to lie in about 65° 20’ of latitude. On the 
thirteenth the day was very clear, and he could see 
seventy-five miles of the coastline. Many rock speci- 
mens embedded in the ice were obtained here. In 
longitude 97° 37’ the ice cut off his progress to west- 
ward. He had come up against the Shackleton Ice 
Shelf (see Mawson’s expedition), and so he turned 
northward and sailed to Tasmania (see Figure 25). 

Thus closed a very memorable Antarctic voyage, 
concerning which there has been considerable con- 
troversy. It has been claimed that Wilkes discovered 
land on January 13th and 16th and therefore antedated 
D’Urville’s discovery of January 19th. But in the 
light of later voyages in these regions it seems very 
doubtful if any of his observations before January 
23rd concerned the mainland, though as stated he may 
have seen an-island which has since escaped notice. 
Thus D’Urville has priority by four days. On the 
other hand, Wilkes’ fine voyage with ill-found ships 
apparently along the coast most of the way from longi- 
tude 148° E. to 108° E. is an achievement which has 
not yet been repeated. Certainly no other ship has 
cruised in that latitude from Adelie Land past North, 
Sabrina, Budd, and Knox lands, for Wilkes was 
favored by an unusually open state of the sea. As to 


28 


EXPLORING ANTARCTIC.SEAS 


whether the name, Wilkes Land, is to be given to all 
this coast or to the restricted area (in 134° E.) mapped 
on Mawson’s expedition and by him named Wilkes 
Land, it is difficult to decide. Even Balch in his 
lengthy discussion of the point is unable to say who 
first used the term “‘Wilkes Land” in the larger sense, 
though he notes that it appears in Stieler’s Atlas pub- 
lished in Germany in 1866. 

The discovery of the North Magnetic Pole in 1831 
by John Ross and James Ross greatly enhanced the 
interest of scientists and laymen in earth magnetism. 
It was fitting that the official British expedition fitted 
out in 1838 and 1839 to investigate the magnetic field 
in the Southern Hemisphere should be under the leader- 
ship of Captain James Ross, who had studied mag- 
netism under Sabine. Hooker, one of the famous trio 
of Victorian scientists (Hooker, Darwin, and Huxley), 
accompanied Ross as surgeon and botanist. Ross 
was directed to establish magnetic observatories at 
Kerguelen and Hobart and then he was to sail south- 
ward and try to reach the South Magnetic Pole. When 
Ross arrived in Australia, he found that D’Urville and 
Wilkes had both made discoveries in the region which 
he proposed to explore. He therefore boldly decided 
to cruise farther east than their tracks, and to try to 
penetrate the pack ice where Balleny had reported open 
water in 1839 (see Figure 5). 

Early in January, 1841, he reached the pack ice and 
his stout bomb-ships readily traversed it, for the first 
time in history, in about nine days. The magnetic 
needle was dipping at 85°, so that the Magnetic Pole 


29 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


could not be far away. However, the massive peaks 
of the Admiralty Range barred the way to the Mag- 
netic Pole and Ross turned southward for 430 miles 
along one of the most remarkable scarped coasts in 
the world. In spite of its high latitude, it seems 
likely that much of the Ross Sea remains open 
throughout the year; so that Ross was able to pass 
Weddell’s record (74° .15’) on’ January. 22nd,7and 
there was still open water to southward. However, 
on January 29th he reached the famous volcanic 
island crowned by Mount Erebus (thirteen thousand 
feet) and since named after himself. The ships now 
sailed to the east along the Ross Ice Shelf for some 
three hundred and fifty miles near latitude 78° S., a 
feat which can in all probability never be beaten else- 
where, for it is unlikely that another huge open gulf 
should exist in the at present uncharted Antarctic 
coasts. He returned to Cape Adare, in the northwest- 
ern part of Ross Sea, and reached Hobart again in 
April, 1841. 

Next summer Ross again journeyed south. On this 
occasion he made his southing considerably to the east 
of his former route. The ships had a very hazardous 
journey through the pack, during which the rudder 
of the ‘Erebus’? was rendered useless, and that of 
the ‘Terror’? was smashed to pieces. He reached the 
head of the Ross Sea not far from King Edward VII 
Land. Here Ross gained his farthest south point at 
78° 9’, and it remained the record for some sixty 
years. On their return they coasted the heavy ice 
pack which bounds the east of the Ross Sea, and nearly 


30 


EXPLORING AN FARCTIC SEAS 


met with disaster on March oth. The ships were en- 
tangled in icebergs, and in the attempt to avoid one 
of these monsters, the “‘Terror’’ collided with the 
“Erebus.’’ We may quote Captain Ross’s own words. 
“Our bowsprit, foretopmast and other smaller spars 
were carried away, and the ships hanging together 
entangled with their rigging, and dashing against each 
other with fearful violence were falling down upon 
the weather face of the lofty berg under our lee, 
against which the waves were breaking and foaming 
to near the summit of its perpendicular cliffs.” After 
extricating themselves the ships just managed to pass 
between two giant bergs and gained comparative safety 
in their lee. On April 6th they reached the Falkland 
Islands. 

Ross made a third voyage to the Antarctic in the 
following summer, this time to the south of America. 
He cruised off the end of Graham Land and Hooker 
made some valuable collections of plants, but the at- 
tempt to follow Weddell was unsuccessful. Ross pene- 
trated to 71° 30’, where he was no great distance from 
Coats Land, but he there turned north and the ships 
ultimately reached England after their long cruises 
in September, 1843. 


CHAP IER: AM 


EXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 
PERIOD 1897-1907 


FTER the return of Ross from the Antarctic in 
A 1843, public interest centered in North Polar 
regions. Sir John Franklin, who had, as governor of 
the colony, helped Ross materially in Tasmania, took 
command in 1845 of a very large and well equipped 
expedition of 129 men to explore the Northwest 
Passage. Not a soul ever returned, and no accurate 
knowledge of their fate was learned until 1859. The 
Antarctic has luckily shown no tragedies to compare 
with this. In South Polar seas the Norwegian and 
Scotch whalers penetrated both the Weddell and Ross 
seas in search of whales. In 1893, Larsen discovered 
Foyn’s Land on the southeast coast of Graham Land, 
while Bruce and Murdoch made their first voyages in 
the adjoining seas. Bull and Borchgrevinck made the 
first landing on Cape Adare in January, 1895, though 
their whaling was not successful. 

In 1897 took place the first expedition in which 
scientific investigation ranked as importantly as the 
charting of new lands. The Belgian, Gerlache, gath- 
ered a cosmopolitan crew, many of whom rose to fame 
in later years. Amundsen, the Norwegian sailor, Cook, 
the American doctor, and Arctowski, the Polish cli- 


32 


EXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


matologist, were members of this expedition. They 
coasted along Graham Land, making numerous land- 
ings in Belgica Strait, and then penetrated west of the 
region between Alexander and Peter islands, passing 
to the south of the latter island (see Figure 4). Here 
they were beset and spent the first Antarctic night 
drifting from 80° 30’ W. to 102° W. They seem to 
have suffered a good deal from confinement and inade- 
quate food, but carried out scientific observations in 
many useful fields. 

To Borchgrevinck must be given the credit for first 
landing on the continent and spending a winter there 
after his ship had returned to temperate climes. On 
the seventeenth of February, 1899, he landed on Cape 
Adare at the northwest extremity of the Ross Sea in 
latitude 71° S. The party consisted of seven Scandi- 
navians and three Britishers, including L. Bernacchi 
and W. Colbeck, who both joined later expeditions. 
The locality was unfavorable as a base for sledging, 
but valuable meteorological observations were made. 
The zoologist, Hanson, died at Cape Adare from some 
disease akin to scurvy. In January, rgoo, their ship 
picked them up and cruised south to the great Ross Ice 
Shelf. On February 19th they made a sledge journey 
of a few miles to the south and reached 78° 45’, which 
was perhaps forty miles south of Ross’s record in 1842. 

With the new century began the most famous period 
of Antarctic exploration. From 1772 to 1900 nothing 
was known of the interior of Antarctica. An ice-bound 
north coast was indicated by Wilkes’ discoveries. A 
stupendous mountain coast flanked the Ross Sea on the 


33 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


west, and a great barrier of ice blocked it to the south. 
But an area greater than Europe lay to the south of 
these discoveries, and many folk believed that it might 
turn out to be an archipelago of islands like that form- 
- ing the polar lands north of Canada. Indeed, we are 
not yet certain that such is not the case in part at least 
in the huge unknown Antarctic regions, but it is to two 
men, Scott and Shackleton, that our main knowledge 
of the interior of the new continent is due. 

The British Expedition of 1902 was largely a naval 
expedition financed by the British Government, but 
generously aided by private contributions. The “Dis- 
covery” was specially built at Dundee and had a regis- 
tered tonnage of 485 tons. Captain Scott was given 
command. 

On Christmas Eve, 1901, the “Discovery” left New 
Zealand and reached Cape Adare on January 8th (see 
Figure 6). They coasted down the great mountain 
scarp of Victoria Land until the twentieth when they 
entered Granite Harbor, which was considered for pos- 
sible winter quarters. Thence they sailed eastward 
along the great Ice Barrier which constitutes the free 
northern edge of the Ross Ice Shelf. On January 
20th they were south and east of the extreme position 
reached by Ross in 1842. Still proceeding eastward 
they sighted and named King Edward VII Land, but 
found no suitable site for winter quarters and turned 
back towards MacMurdo Sound. En route at Balloon 
Bight Scott made the first balloon ascent in Antarctica. 
On February 8th Scott reached the southwest corner 
of Ross Island—and here at Cape Armitage he an- 


34 


SOUTH, PCLE 
10,000 


SeolF 
Jan 1912. 


ackletsn 


s 
SAsSsssZ~7, 
“ wanes 


SS 


~ 
> 


SON 


yy : 
Ly 
a 


ee? 
> of 


7 foc: 
Sar Al: — 


ph is 
Al! 
bapa »- 
= 


Fic. 6.—Map oF SoutH VictTor1IA LAND AND VICINITY. 


The Great Horst (Fault-Block) is shown by heavy ruling, Main 
routes of Scott, Shackleton, Amundsen and Byrd are shown. Insets 
are fossil fish-plates from Granite Harbor. (According to Gould, 
Carmen Land is largely non-existent. ) 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


chored the “Discovery” for the long winter. Here he 
built the 1902 hut (see Figure 8), but it was not 
used as the expedition lived in the ship. 

Various short sledge journeys were made, one being 
to Cape Crozier, east of Ross Island, to leave a record 
of the voyage. On the return some of the men were 
caught in a blizzard, and not realizing their danger 
tried to reach the ship in the storm. Nine of them slid 
down the steep icy slopes below Castle Rock (near 
the hut), and one man, Vince, lost his life. Unfor- 
tunately he wore fur boots so he was unable to regain 
his footing and was dashed into the icy sea. 

The return of the sun on August 21st made longer 
sledging possible. In October Royds went again to 
Cape Crozier and here discovered the “rookery” of the 
Emperor Penguins. Early in November Scott, Wil- 
son, and Shackleton started their fine journey to the 
south, which traversed the first third of the long jour- 
ney to the South Pole (see Figure 6). The men were 
assisted by dogs, and Scott gained the poorest opinion 
of dog sledging on this journey. On December 15th 
they approached the Great Scarp (to the west) in lati- 
tude 80° 30’, but found their way barred by an enor- 
mous chasm some three-quarters of a mile wide. Here 
they left a depot and continued southward parallel to 
the coast. Symptoms of scurvy developed in Shackle- 
ton, but they pushed on to 82° 16’ S.. To the south- 
west towered a twin peak some fifteen thousand feet 
high, which they named after Admiral Markham. An 
attempt to reach the land across the great chasm was 
unsuccessful. On the return the dogs were practically 


36 


EXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


useless and could barely stagger eight miles a day; in 
fact, they ‘walked alongside the sledges.” Scott had 
difficulty in picking up their depot, which, however, was 
attained on January 13th. The last two dogs (out of 
nineteen) were killed near here as they were unable to 
pull. Shackleton’s scurvy became rapidly worse and 
on January 18th his strength gave out and he was un- 
able to help, and indeed for a time was dragged on the 
sledge. However, on the twentieth they reached the 
depot at Minna Bluff (78° 45’). Shackleton was now 
very ill, but Scott and Wilson managed to bring him 
back to the ship, which they reached on February 2nd. 
They had covered 960 miles in 93 days. 

Meanwhile the western party under Armitage left 
on November 29th to penetrate the mountains (see 
Figure 8). They ascended the Blue Glacier to six 
thousand feet and then glissaded down Descent Pass 
to a level of two thousand feet on the Ferrar Glacier. 
Then they ascended the latter glacier below wonderful 
cliffs, which it was my privilege to examine in detail 
eight years later. On the twenty-third of December 
they reached the ice divide between the two apposed 
glaciers, the Ferrar Glacier in the southern valley and 
Taylor Glacier in the northern valley. Continuing up 
the Taylor Glacier, they reached the Plateau on New 
Year’s Day at a height of 7,500 feet, being the first 
to achieve this feat. In January, 1903, they reached 
nine thousand feet (near latitude 78, longitude 158) 
and then returned by the same laborious route up 
Descent Pass, not knowing that an easy track down the 
Ferrar Glacier lay before them. 


37 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


b 


Late in January a relief ship, the “Morning,” under 
Captain Colbeck, reached MacMurdo Sound. Shackle- 
ton returned home in her, being replaced by Mulock. 
It was impossible to free the “Discovery” and so a sec- 
ond winter was spent in the Antarctic. After several 
preliminary spring journeys Scott started on October 
12th for his long plateau journey. He arranged for 
Ferrar, the geologist, to spend several weeks in these 
great glacial troughs. On October 18th Scott dis- 
covered that the sledge runners were in very bad 
condition and had to return to refit them. On the 
twenty-ninth they were once more above Solitary 
Rocks, on the Taylor Glacier, and reached their former 
depot. Here the gales had resulted in the loss of vart- 
ous articles, including Scott’s mathematical tables. 
They were held up for a whole week in a blizzard in 
this locality. On the twelfth of November they reached 
the great plateau and advanced steadily to the west. 
Scott found that some of the party were in poor con- 
dition and so he sent them back under Skelton, and 
he proceeded west with seaman Evans and engineer 
Lashley. They marched over an undulating ice sur- 
face diversified only by marked sastrugi (snow ridges 
due to wind). “These are shaped like the barbs of a 
hook with their sharp points turned to the east, from 
which direction many look high and threatening.” * On 
calculating Scott’s positions on their return it was 
found that he had reached 146° 33’ E. and latitude 
78° S. (see Figure 6). They had a very anxious 


1See Scott’s Voyage of the Discovery, Vol. II, p. 264. 
38 


EXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


time on their return journey since they ran out of 
food and oil and had no accurate idea of their posi- 
tion. They fell down three hundred feet of steep 
slope in drifting snow, and found they had actually 
approached their glacier depot. A few hours later 
Scott and Evans simultaneously fell into a wide cre- 
vasse. It was a terrible experience, for Lashley could 
not help them, as the sledge from which they were sus- 
pended was broken and only held back by his efforts. 
Scott climbed out unaided, and soon the party reached 
their depot. They then reached the snout of the glacier 
later named by Scott after the writer, and returning 
down the Ferrar Glacier reached the ship on Christmas 
Eve (see Figure 8). 

On January sth, 1904, two relief ships reached 
MacMurdo Sound but could not get to the “Discovery” 
by some six miles. After trying to cut a passage for 
the latter with ice saws, they had recourse to explo- 
sives ; but the swell from the north finally broke up the 
pack ice on February 14th. On the seventeenth the 
“Discovery” ran aground in a gale near Cape Armi- 
tage, but luckily no great damage was done. On March 
2nd they passed Sturge Island in the Balleny group, 
and then proceeded west to find Wilkes’ landmarks: 
Eld’s Peak, Ringgold’s Knoll, and Cape Hudson (see 
Figure 5). Scott writes on March 4th, “I must con- 
clude that as these places are nonexistent, there is no 
case for any land eastward of Adelie Land.”’ On April 
Ist the “Discovery” reached Lyttelton Harbor, N. Z., 
and on the tenth of September, 1904, the ship anchored 
at Spithead in the Isle of Wight. 


a9 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


ree 
D\Sceogy Elephant Is. 


South End/of 
Wilkins’ ight 


12/2 


Fic. 7—CHART OF THE WEDDELL SEA (INCORPORATING 
WILKINS’ DISCOVERIES ). 

W. marks the start of Wilkins’ flight to Charcot Island late 

in 1929. (Based on American Geographical Review, July, 1920. ) 

Drygalski—We must now devote some attention to 

the expeditions sent out in the same year, I90I, by 

Germany and Sweden. The former was in charge of 


40 


inn a ——— 


PRPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


b) 


Professor Drygalski in the ship “Gauss,” named after 
the famous German authority on magnetism. After 
landing at Kerguelen Island in the Indian Ocean, they 
sailed south to the region where Wilkes had turned 
north in 1842 (see Figure 4). Towards the end of 
February they reached shallow soundings and on the 
twenty-first saw land some forty-six miles to the south. 
Here the “‘Gauss’’ was beset, and the expedition spent 
the winter just north of the Antarctic Circle. They 
sent out some sledging parties, none of which made 
long journeys. A large mass of volcanic rock pro- 
jected as a nunatak from the icebound coast and was 
called the Gaussberg. On the return of spring the 
“Gauss” broke free from the ice and struggled to the 
west in the pack for two months. This expedition 
added little to the map of Antarctica, but very valuable 
records in the domain of oceanography and meteorology 
were obtained (see Figure 5). 

Nordenskjold—The Swedish expedition was one of 
the most adventurous and successful which has ever 
sailed to the south. It was commanded by Dr. Norden- 
skjold, who was specially interested in the structure 
of South America and wished to investigate similar 
problems in West Antarctica (Graham Land). They 
reached the Falkland Islands on the thirty-first of De- 
cember, 1901, and the South Shetland Isles on the 
tenth of January, 1902. Nordenskjold tried to pierce 
the ice to the south without success, and followed the 
edge of the pack to the east to longitude 44° W. (see 
Figure 7). Driven back by storms, he decided to 
make his winter quarters on Snow Hill Island (64° 30’ 


Al 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


S.) where there was a promising collecting ground for 
fossils. The ship “Antarctic” left them on the four- 
teenth of February, 1902, and here the party remained 
until the tenth of November, 1903 (see Figure 7). 
During October of 1902 they sledged south about 
two hundred miles to latitude 66° S., but most of their 
time was spent in exploring and collecting within a few 
days’ journey of their hut. No ship came to their 
relief in December, 1902, and they spent a second win- 
ter in the Antarctic. In October, 1903, Nordenskjold 
was exploring the region to the west when he met two 
begrimed and ragged beings who turned out to be two 
of his countrymen, Anderson and Duse, who had tried 
without success to reach him from his relief ship early 
in 1903. They had therefore built a stone hut at Hope 
Bay, some one hundred miles to the north of Snow 
Hill; and after a winter there had managed to get in 
touch with him. Meanwhile Captain Larsen on the 
“Antarctic” had met with dire misfortune, for the ship 
was crushed by the terrible pack ice of the Weddell 
Sea, and sank on the twelfth of February, 1903. Lar- 
sen and his crew of nineteen reached Paulet Island, 
about seventy miles northeast of Snow Hill, and here 
a third hut was built, and so a third party spent the 
winter of 1903 on the coasts of Graham Land. 
When the ice broke out Larsen set off in a boat to visit 
Hope Bay and then Snow Hill, where he arrived an 
hour after the relief expedition sent by the Argentine 
government in the ship “Uruguay.’”’ On the second of 
December, 1903, they all reached Buenos Aires safely. 
While not much was added to the map of Antarctica, 


42 


EXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


perhaps no other expedition has been so successful with 
its geological and paleontological investigations in 
Antarctica. These will be described in a later chapter. 

Bruce.—It is natural that Scotland, from which so 
many whalers set out year after year, should be in- 
terested in polar exploration. In 1892 Dr. Bruce had 
made a voyage with the whaling fleet to Graham Land, 
and in 1902 he was successful in leading a scientific 
expedition to explore Antarctic regions. The “Scotia”’ 
left Scotland in November and reached the Falkland 
Islands early in January, 1903 (see Figure 4). Bruce 
made two voyages into the Weddell Sea area in the 
successive summers. On February 2nd they reached 
the Pack Ice at 60° 28’, whereas Ross found it at 
65° and D’Urville at 63° 30’. They visited the South 
Orkneys and then pushed to the southeast across the 
mouth of the Weddell Sea, gradually getting farther 
south as they moved to windward. They were unable 
to proceed farther than 70° 25’ on February 22nd, 
when they were in the vicinity of Coats Land, though 
this area was still to be discovered. For a week they 
were nearly beset, and as the season was fairly late 
they turned north, making valuable soundings. Bruce 
decided to winter in the South Orkneys, which were 
practically unknown scientifically and very poorly 
charted before his expedition’s advent. On the beach 
at Scotia Bay in Laurie Island (see Figure 7), they 
built a stone hut for the observers in spring. The 
island is about twelve miles long and is cut up by long 
bays running northwest and southeast. Silurian grap- 
tolites were discovered at the eastern end, and the 


43 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


island was found to be wholly built of sedimentary 
rocks. This indicates its former connection with a 
large continent, and is of much interest, for islands far 
distant from land are generally built of coral or vol- 
canic rocks. 

Late in February, 1904, the “Scotia” again sailed 
south, making for the same region she had visited the 
year before. On March 1st they found open water 
where there had been impenetrable pack. Next day 
they discovered a lofty ice barrier and were able to ap- 
proach within two miles of it. On the sixth they had 
traced one hundred and fifty miles of this coast, which 
was named Coats Land after the Glasgow merchants 
who had made the expedition possible. Many conti- 
nental bowlders were dredged, but no rock was seen 
on the barrier. They reached 74° 1’ S. and for some 
days the chance of escape from the heavy pack seemed 
small, for the ‘Scotia’? was held fast by the bows. 
However, on the fourteenth of March they broke loose 
and steamed north along the meridian of 10° W., mak- 
ing a series of soundings. They made a brief visit to 
Gough Island, 1,500 miles from the Cape, and reached 
Capetown on May 5th. 

Charcot.—In August, 1903, the French expedition 
under Dr. Charcot left Havre to investigate the west 
side of Graham Land. They entered Gerlache Strait 
but could not penetrate the pack near the Biscoe Islands 
and so established winter quarters on Wandel Isle in 
latitude 65° S. They made detailed investigations of 
the geography and geology of the surrounding coasts, 
reaching the small Biscoe Islands in a whale boat. 


44 


ee Ee a ae ee ae 


EXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


The ship was not able to leave Wandel Isle until mid- 
December, when they proceeded to the southwest and 
discovered Loubet Land to the east. They also ob- 
tained a view of Alexander Land (1821) on the 
eleventh of January, but were then compelled to steer 
north. After an exciting collision with an iceberg 
they safely reached American waters (see Figure 7). 


1907 TO 1913 

In December, 1908, Charcot was again in the Ant- 
arctic in the ship ‘Pourquoi Pas,” with a group of 
eight scientists and a very complete equipment. He 
surveyed the coast in greater detail and added a great 
deal to our knowledge of the lands south of the Ant- 
arctic Circle. A large gulf lies to west of Adelaide 
and Alexander islands. He made a careful study of 
the region south of Adelaide Island and climbed Jenny 
Island. He reached within a few miles of Alexander 
Island and was able to chart approximately a coastline 
some two hundred miles long to the east, which he 
called Fallieres Land. (This is part of what Wilkins 
calls South Graham Land, and is really a large island. ) 

The ship was unable to find a suitable harbor on 
Fallieres Land and sailed north to Lund (or Peter- 
man) Isle a few miles south of Wandel Isle. They 
made an attempt to explore the region to the east and 
climbed a glacier to a height of three thousand feet, 
but the rugged topography foiled their efforts to reach 
the summit. Late in November, 1900, they left win- 
ter quarters and after visiting Deception Island for 
stores, they sailed again to the southwest to the seas 


45 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


traversed by Gerlache in 1898. Charcot was able to 
reach more southern latitudes so that he discovered 
Charcot Land in latitude 70° S. and longitude 77° W. 
He proceeded to the west, passed Peter Island, and 
reached longitude 120° W., where he was well south 
of latitude 70° S., and only about seven hundred miles 
from Edward VII Land. From the shallow sound- 
ings, Charcot was sure that land lay not far to the 
south along much of his cruise (see Figure 4). 

Shackleton’s First Expedition, 1907—-1908.—No man 
has done more to decipher the secrets of the South Pole 
than Ernest Shackleton. Of his four voyages the first 
under Captain Scott has been described. His second 
voyage was by far the most important. His expedi- 
tion was financed privately and set sail in the “Nim- 
rod.” Murray, a biologist, and Priestley, a geologist, 
came from England with Shackleton. They were later 
joined by two eminent scientists, Edgeworth David and 
Douglas Mawson, from Australia. Adams, Marshall, 
and Wild were other notable members. Shackleton, 
like Scott, had no belief in dogs, but he made a new 
departure in southern exploration by taking eight Man- 
churian ponies to Antarctica. They left New Zealand 
on New Year’s Day, 1908, and to save coal his ship 
was towed to 66° S. by a steamer. 

Shackleton had hoped to build his hut at Edward 
VII Land, but he was unable to find a suitable site, 
and like Scott he turned to the west and made his 
winter quarters at Cape Royds, on Ross Island, about 
fourteen miles north of Scott’s hut of 1902-3. The 
first exploit was to climb Mount Erebus, which tow- 


46 


oe 


ey ee ee 


EXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


ered thirteen thousand feet above the hut to the east. 
On March 5th, 1908, six men, led by David and 
Adams, started their ascent. They dragged a sledge 
up to 2,750 feet, where they camped. On March 6th 
they reached 5,630 feet before camping in the oldest 
crater of Erebus. They left the sledge here, and, carry- 
ing bags and the tent, but no poles, reached 8,750 feet 
on the evening of March 7th. The temperature here 
was 20° below zero Fahrenheit. Here a blizzard beset 
them, and without tent poles they were in a precarious 
position. Brocklehurst was nearly frozen to death and 
Mackay fainted from mountain sickness near the sum- 
mit. Here they found another ancient crater with a 
wall one hundred feet high and containing many snow- 
cowled fumaroles emitting steam. At their camp at 
11,400 feet it was found that Brocklehurst was se- 
verely frostbitten, and he lost a toe as a consequence. 
The other five men reached the summit at IO A.M. on 
March toth (see Figure I1). 

“We stood on the verge of a vast abyss, and at first 
could see neither to the bottom nor across it on account 
of the huge mass of steam filling the crater and soaring 
aloft in a column one thousand feet high. After a con- 
tinuous hissing sound there would come from below 
a big dull boom, and great masses of steam would rush 
upwards. . . .’”’. Mawson’s angular measurement made 
the depth of the crater nine hundred feet. Beds of 
lava or pumice alternated with white zones of snow in 
the crater wall. They returned to the hut in two days. 


” 


One of the most adventurous journeys in polar his- 
tory was that which commenced on October 29th, 


47 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


1908, with the South Pole as its object. Shackleton 
chose Lieutenant Adams, Dr. Marshall, and Frank 
Wild for his companions. Each man led a pony sledge 
and for a few days a supporting party accompanied 
them. They had a bad time with crevasses on the 
Ross Ice Shelf where it presses around Minna Bluff, 
but thereafter progressed directly to the south. The 
pony, Quan, enlivened their journey by eating harness, 
ropes, rugs, and all he could reach. On the twenty- 
first of November they were south of the 81° parallel, 
and here the first pony was shot. Some of the pony 
flesh was used for food, being eaten practically raw as 
it became too tough when cooked. They were now 
approaching Scott’s record and marching abreast of a 
new range of mountains. On November 23rd they 
made a fine march of almost eighteen miles, and on 
November 26th were south of Scott’s “farthest” of 
82° 16’. The barrier surface had the form of long 
undulations, the width from crest to crest being about 
one and a half miles. The second pony was shot at 
Depot C and the third at 83° 16’, leaving only Socks. 
The mountains showed great granite cliffs six thousand 
feet high in places. The range now trended across 
their path and Shackleton decided to ascend one of 
the many glaciers flowing from the Plateau (to the 
west) down to the Ross Ice Shelf. On December 3rd 
they climbed Mount Hope (3,350 feet) and ‘“‘from the 
top of this ridge there burst upon our view an open road 
to the south. We could see the glacier stretching away 
south inland till at last it seemed to merge in high in- 
land ice.” (See Figure 6.) They climbed two thousand 
48 


EXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


feet over a pass and then descended to the foot of the 
great Beardmore Glacier. On December 7th Wild was 
leading the pony over a snow bridge when “he felt a sort 
of rushing wind, the leading rope was snatched from 
his hand and he just caught the further edge of the 
chasm. Sock’s weight snapped the swingle-tree of the 
sledge so that it was saved. We lay down on our 
stomachs and looked over into the gulf, but no sound 
or sign came to us; a black bottomless pit it seemed 
ete.” 

They struggled among bad crevasses from December 
7th to December 16th for nearly one hundred miles 
and had risen six thousand feet up the Beardmore 
Glacier. On December 17th Wild found specimens of 
coal in the cliffs of Mount Buckley to the north, but it 
was not till December 27th that they really reached the 
head of this enormous glacier at a height of 9,820 feet. 
They were all somewhat affected by the altitude, and 
found it severe work to pull 150 pounds per man. 
On January 6th they marched thirteen miles against a 
strong blizzard with a temperature of 57 degrees of 
frost, and on January 9th they reached 88° 23’ S. in 
longitude 162° E. No explorer, either north or south, 
has ever made so great an advance on previous records 
as did Shackleton on this wonderful unsupported march 
of 420 miles in unknown and dangerous country (see 
Figure 6). 

Their return journey for a time was easier, as on 
January 19th when they marched nearly thirty miles a 
day, helped now by the southern blizzards. Their de- 
scent of the Beardmore Glacier was full of dangers, 


49 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


and they exhausted all their food on January 26th, 
but soon picked up their depot and reached the Ross 
Ice Shelf again on January 29th. Early in February 
all suffered greatly from dysentery, but on the twelfth 
they reached the depot where the pony, Chinaman, was 
shot and they feasted on his liver. On the nineteenth 
they sighted Erebus and next day reached Depot A. 
Marshall became very feeble and was left with Adams 
while Shackleton and Wild pushed north to Hut Point 
on Ross Island. Here they found open water separat- 
ing them from Cape Royds. After some time they 
managed to make a signal fire, and on March Ist they 
were aboard the ship. Shackleton immediately started 
back to bring in Marshall and all the expedition were 
united on March 4th. 

On October 5th the Magnetic Pole party started with 
Professor David as leader. He was accompanied by 
Mawson and Mackay. They sledged up the western 
coast of Ross Sea, a hazardous journey on the sea-ice 
in view of the probable breaking up of the ice without 
notice. On October 26th they crossed the mouth of 
Granite Harbor, and on November Ist they made a 
depot of much of their food and gear at Depot Island 
(latitude 76° 40’). This was necessary because they 
could only relay four miles a day owing to the load 
and heavy surface. On November 11th they reached 
the Nordenskjold Ice Tongue and crossed it in two 
days (see Figure 6). A fortnight later they first saw 
the much larger Drygalski Ice Tongue, that “scaly 
horror with his folded tail,’ as David describes it (see 
Figure 19). On the twenty-ninth they started to cross 


50 


EXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


it, but were foiled for some days by the chasms and 
ridges, but made a successful traverse between Decem- 
ber 6th and 11th. They halted for a few days here 
and killed seals and penguins to supplement their food, 
for their further journey of two hundred miles to the 
Magnetic Pole. On December 17th they made their 
way inland, having a risky time with crevasses which 
nearly engulfed the whole party. A difficult track over 
the north side of the Larsen Glacier enabled them to 
ascend to the Great Ice Plateau, which was reached by 
a fairly smooth route on December 28th. By January 
roth the Great Ice Plateau had gradually risen to seven 
thousand feet. On the fifteenth they were so close 
to the daily fluctuating “Pole” that Mawson thought 
it might swing beneath them! However, they marched 
some miles farther and on January 16th arrived at 
72.25", . latitude and 155° 167-2, awhich Mawson 
deduced to be the Magnetic Pole (see Figure 2). On 
their return they had to make over sixteen miles a day 
to be at the coast in time for the relief ship. Descend- 
ing the Larsen Glacier they had a very difficult task 
in crossing the weathered and crevassed ice near its 
junction with the Great Ice Shelf, but on the third of 
February they ended their splendid journey on the 
coast, just north of the Drygalski Ice Tongue. It was 
a dramatic finish that this exhausted party should have 
been met by the ship on the very day they reached the 
coast, for they would have had little chance of a safe 
return to headquarters by their own efforts. 

Many other exciting incidents occurred on this ex- 
pedition. Thus the Western Geological Party was car- 


51 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


ried away for twenty-four hours on an ice floe from 
New Harbor towards the open sea and only just saved 
themselves at a momentary contact with fixed ice. 
Macintosh and a sailor had a wild journey with letters 
from the ship off Cape Bird to Cape Royds. The sea 
ice broke up into small floes and after waiting some 
days on the rocky coast they made their way five thou- 
sand feet up the slopes of Ross Island. By some 
miracle they escaped the fields of crevasses and reached 
the 1907 hut without food or gear on January 12th. 

Scott, 1910-1913.—The most tragic of Antarctic 
expeditions was that led by Captain Robert Falcon 
Scott to the southern continent in 1910. It had two 
objects. Firstly, the leader wished to surpass Shackle- 
ton’s journey and reach the South Pole. Secondly, 
there were many scientists on the expedition whose 
special aim was to make detailed surveys in as many 
coastal regions as might be found possible. All these 
objects were attained, but the tragic loss of the five 
members of the pole party involved the deaths of Scott, 
the leader, of Wilson, the director of science, of Oates, 
the officer in charge of transport, of Bowers, who was 
in charge of all stores, and of Evans, the chief petty 
officer. 

The expedition left Lyttelton in New Zealand on 
November 26th, 1910. They experienced a furious 
gale which nearly sank the ‘“Terra Nova” in the “Furi- 
ous Fifties’ near Campbell Island.* The ship was held 
back by the dense pack for some three weeks, an un- 


2 This incident is described later on page 108. 


52 


Pe-PLORING, THE: GREAT CONTINENT 


usually long period, for ice extended from 64° 30’ S. to 
ga 20 5. On: jatiuary 3rd. Scott tried to land at 
Cape Crozier, but this being impossible he sailed up 
MacMurdo Sound and fixed his headquarters at Cape 
Evans, about halfway between the huts of the 1902 
and 1907 expeditions (see Figure 8). Fine weather 
enabled the hut to be rapidly built, so that the depot- 
laying party and the Western Geological Party were 
able to leave on the twenty-fourth of January, IgIT. 
Thereafter the ship sailed toward King Edward VII 
Land where Campbell’s party was to make a base for 
scientific survey. On arrival at the Bay of Whales 
they found Amundsen there in the “Fram.’’ Campbell, 
therefore, was transferred to Cape Adare, where the 
northern party spent the ensuing year (see Figure 6). 

The southern party with the ponies, under Scott, 
carried a large store of food to One Ton Camp, about 
one hundred miles south of Ross Island. They had 
many narrow escapes from crevasses, but the most 
hazardous experience was when Bowers’ party of three 
found themselves adrift after camping on the sea-ice 
near the 1902 Hut (see Figure 8). For many hours 
they tried to bring off the ponies by jumping the floes, 
but finally only one pony was saved. The others fell 
into the sea and were devoured by killer-whales. The 
first western party under my leadership, with Wright 
and Debenham as fellow-scientists, marched up the 
Ferrar Glacier making detailed topographic, glacial, 
and geological surveys (see Figure 8). We crossed 
the Ice Divide at Knob Head and then sledged down 
the adjacent Taylor Glacier to its snout, some twenty- 


53 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


JOURNEYS OF THE 
WESTERN GEOLOGICAL PARTIES 


7000: 
Cc 
= PLaTRAU 


I 


OEBENHA™M D) 
GLACIER 


Fic. 8.—Mar oF MacMurpo SouND, SHOWING ROUTES 
OF THE AUTHOR’S PARTIES IN EXPLORING THE FOUR GREAT 
OUTLET GLACIERS. 

. (By permission of John Murray.) 


five miles from the sea. The unique snow-free valley 
offered most interesting topographic examples of the 
way in which the continent was carved by the waning 
glaciers. Returning we traversed the Bowers Pied- 
mont Glacier and made our way up the pinnacled ice 


54 


PXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


of the great Koettlitz Glacier. Here a subglacial stream 
twenty-five miles long was surveyed. We sledged back 
round the breaking Barrier to the old 1902 hut at Cape 
Armitage, where we arrived a week later than the 
depot party. Here the two parties were held up by 
open water from March 15th till April 11th, when we 
managed to find a route free from crevasses along the 
slopes of Erebus to Glacier Tongue, and so reached 
Cape Evans on April 13th (see Figure 8). 

The outstanding feature of the winter was the jour- 
ney of Wilson, Bowers, and Cherry-Garrard to obtain 
data as to the evolution of those primitive birds, the 
emperor penguins. These lay their eggs in midwinter 
at Cape Crozier, and the party spent five weeks under 
almost unbearable conditions with the objective of ob- 
taining the eggs. Their only light was either from the 
nioon or from a special candle lamp. The temper- 
ature fell to —77° F. and was constantly below 
—60°. Their tent and gear were blown away in a 
furious blizzard and much of it lost. It was so cold 
that for weeks they were unable to obtain proper sleep, 
and at the end dozed while marching. Well has this 
been termed the “Worst Journey in the World.” 

On the thirty-first of October, 1911, in the second 
summer, Scott left Cape Evans on his last journey. 
He had to traverse some nine hundred miles to the 
Pole, of which three hundred and fifty miles lay at an 
elevation of nearly ten thousand feet above sea level. 
Another one hundred and fifty miles was expended in 
ascending the Beardmore Glacier, while four hundred 
and twenty miles was on the Ross Ice Shelf near sea 


55 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


level. The two motor sledges were not very successful 
in transporting stores, and unfortunately Scott placed 
little reliance on dog sledging. As in the case of 
Shackleton’s journey, ponies pulled most of the load to 
the foot of the Beardmore Glacier, but south of latitude 
83° the sledges were hauled by men. Various support- 
ing parties turned back before the Pole was reached. 
Thus Day’s party turned near 81°; Meares and the 
dogs reached the Beardmore; Atkinson and _ three 
others went back from 85° S. at the top of the Beard- 
more on December 21st. By the end of the year the 
two remaining parties had reached 87° S., and on 
January 4th Lieutenant Evans, with Lashley and 
Crean, turned back when they were one hundred and 
forty-five miles from the Pole. Evans nearly died of 
scurvy on this journey, but was saved by the gallantry 
of his two companions, who dragged him many miles 
on the sledge to safety. By January 8th the polar party 
had beaten Shackleton’s record, but very difficult sur- 
faces made the last one hundred miles a terrible ordeal. 
Sometimes it would take nearly five hours to pull six 
miles with a fairly light sledge, for they had depoted 
almost all their food by now. On January 16th they 
found the cairn and flag of the Norwegian party and 
so knew that. they had been forestalled by four weeks. 
On January 17th they made their sixty-ninth camp at 
the Pole on the high plateau some ten thousand feet 
above the sea with a midsummei temperature of 
—22° F. Scott writes in his diary, ‘““We. built a cairn, 
put up the Union Jack and took a photograph—mighty 
cold work, all of it.” (See Figure 6.) 
56 


EXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


The homeward march began on January roth. It 
was hard work, for they had to rise one thousand feet 
in the next week’s marches. However, the stern wind 
helped them somewhat. Blizzards slowed down their 
speed and the surface ice deteriorated to “‘sandy crys- 
tals” with similar results. On February 7th they 
reached the head of the Beardmore Glacier after seven 
weeks of low temperatures and almost incessant wind. 
Here Petty Officer Evans sustained concussion from a 
bad fall, and as a result the strongest man of the party 
became a drag on their progress. On the seventeenth 
of February he fainted and died the same night, just 
near Mount Hope at the foot of the Beardmore Glacier. 
The journey on the Ross Ice Shelf was marked by head 
winds, bad surface and by very low temperatures, so 
that a rise to. —20° seemed a great improvement. 
Oates was feeling the cold more than the others and 
his feet were giving him great pain from frostbite. 
On the seventeenth he walked out of the tent into the 
blizzard and died in a vain effort to give his comrades 
a better chance to reach safety. With a northerly wind 
in their faces and a temperature of —4o0°, on the nine- 
teenth of March they struggled to their last camping 
ground, about eleven miles from One Ton Camp, with 
only two days’ food. It is sad to realize that a dog 
team with two men had been at One Ton Camp from 
the third to the tenth of March, when the food for the 
dogs was almost exhausted, and they had to return. 
If the plans for relief had not been totally upset by 
the illness of Lieutenant Evans, it is probable that a 
longer relief journey could have been made and so 


57 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


four members of the Pole party might have been saved. 
A blizzard held Scott and his comrades to their tent 
for nine days and the last message was dated March 
29th. Seven months later, when winter had passed, 
their bodies were found by a party under Atkinson, 
and left there under a giant snow cairn in the Antarctic 
solitudes. 

A few words must be given to the northern and 
western parties. The latter under myself with Deben- 
ham and two others spent three months in mapping 
in detail the coast line north of our previous journey. 
A careful topographic and geological survey of Granite 
Harbor was made, and the party sledged up the Mackay 
Glacier to Mount Suess, which was ascended (see Fig- 
ure 24). Near here coal and Devonian fish were 
found. The ship could not pick us up owing to the 
heavy belt of pack ice so we traversed the thirty-mile- 
wide Wilson Piedmont and were picked up by the ship 
on the fourteenth of February, 1912, near the Koett- 
litz Glacier. The northern party had not been able to 
sledge far from Cape Adare, but made very valuable 
records of glaciology and meteorology in this distant 
locality. The ship brought them south to the Ice Shelf 
north of the Drygalski Tongue. Here they were left 
on January 8th, 1912, with six weeks’ food, to explore 
the hinterland north of where David had been picked 
up in 1909. They made a valuable map of the region 
and Priestley found very interesting Permian fossil 
trees. The ship was unable to reach this party owing 
to the heavy screw pack, so that on March 16th they 
started to burrow into a snow drift to form a snow 


58 


EXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


hut. Here they dwelt, cursed by darkness and semi- 
starvation until October Ist. One of the men was so 
ill that it was necessary to drag him on the sledge. 
On October 29th they had their first full meal, from a 
depot, left by myself on Cape Roberts; and they reached 
the hut safely on November 7th after a wonderful 
journey, considering their debilitating winter conditions. 

Meanwhile the most complete record yet obtained of 
Antarctic weather had been made at headquarters by 
Dr. Simpson, and it is believed that these and other 
voluminous scientific memoirs in geology, glaciology, 
topography, surveying, and biology will make this ex- 
pedition as notable in the annals of science as it is in 
the record of polar exploration. 

Amundsen.—This explorer was a member of the 
Belgian expedition in 1899 and had since done fine 
work in the “Gjoa”’ in Arctic seas. His plan to reach 
the North Pole was forestalled by Peary, and so he 
decided to attempt the South Pole, before using the 
“Fram” to explore the North Polar ocean. He in- 
formed the crew of the change of plan at Madeira and 
then proceeded to the Ross Barrier Shelf, which was 
reached on the eleventh of January, 1911. On the 
fourteenth he started to build his station on a portion 
of the shelf which appeared to be immovable. Here 
Amundsen took a grave risk, which success justified, 
for much of the shelf to the west breaks away each 
year. Another great advantage was that it was so far 
from the Great Ice Plateau that few blizzards, due to 
“gravity flow” of the air, hindered their plans. Fur- 
thermore, it was much nearer the Pole than Cape Evans 


59 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


and was, of course, in touch with the south, while 
Cape Evans was isolated in summer from the Ice Shelf 
by open water. In the first summer Amundsen laid 
a depot to 82° S. and after an uneventful winter they 
started for the Pole on September 8th (see Figure 6). 
The cold was, however, too severe and they returned 
to make a final start on October 19th. Five men 
formed the party, Amundsen, Bjaaland, Wisting, Has- 
sel, and Hansen. They had fifty-two dogs, who pulled 
so willingly that the men either rode the sledges or 
were dragged right across the Ross Ice Shelf for some 
four hundred miles. They reached the foot of the out- 
let glacier on November toth. On November 12th 
Carmen Land * was seen, an elevated region which 
bounds the Ross Ice Shelf to the southeast. 

Amundsen had considerable difficulty in reaching 
the Ice Plateau. They ascended two thousand feet to 
find that cross valleys blocked their way, and after 
reaching ten thousand feet through a maze of glaciers 
there was still no clear route to the Plateau. For 
twelve days they journeyed through the mountains amid 
enormous crevasses and were often shrouded in fog. 
They killed all but eighteen dogs, and on December Ist 
struggled through to the Plateau. Here they often 
made marches of twenty miles a day. In 88° S. they 
were over ten thousand feet above the sea, but the 
Plateau descended somewhat to the Pole, as Scott also 
found on his traverse to the west. The Pole was 
reached on December 14th, and after taking careful 


3 Dr. Gould reported in December, 1929, that no land occurs 
where Amundsen places Carmen Land. 


60 


EXPLORING THE GREAT CONTINENT 


observations during several days they turned back to 
the north. On January 6th they were back on the Ross 
Ice Shelf, and with plentiful food and active dogs we 
get the impression that Amundsen held the dogs back in 
order to reach Framheim just on the twenty-fifth, as 
he had foretold. The journey of 1,860 miles had taken 
99 days, and was a triumph of good arrangement and 
adequate transport. 

As a scientific journey, however, it was largely a 
waste of time, for Amundsen brought back hardly any 
cartographic data and practically no geological or topo- 
graphic material. When we think of Scott’s party 
dragging their invaluable geological specimens back 
when they knew they were doomed; or of Bowers’ 
wonderful navigation data and his meteorological log; 
or of the books filled with accurate drawings by Dr. 
Wilson; there is little question as to which party had 
the true interests of discovery most at heart. A useful 
journey by Amundsen’s lieutenant (Prestrud) to the 
east resulted in some further knowledge of King Ed- 
ward VII Land. On January 16th a Japanese vessel 
arrived at Framheim, but the Japanese appear to have 
done little of note during their dash to the Antarctic. 
Amundsen left the Bay of Whales on January 30th and 
reached Hobart early in March, 1912. 

With the achievement of the South Pole by two na- 
tions we may fittingly close this chapter on Antarctic 
exploration, for though there have been half a dozen 
noteworthy journeys since 1912, they may well be con- 
sidered in a new chapter under the heading of recent 
exploration. 


61 


CHAPTER IV 
RECENT EXPEDITIONS TO THE ANTARCTIC 


N the last chapter we have seen how our knowledge 

of the great continent was so remarkably advanced 
during that short period between 1go01 and 1912. Be- 
fore that nothing was known of the interior, and noth- 
ing of winter conditions except at two or three localities 
at relatively low latitudes. Since 1912 we have had 
a reasonably good idea of most of the varying environ- 
ments which are to be found in Antarctica, whether it 
be High Plateau, floating Ice Shelf, outlet glaciers 
of the Great Scarp, or subglacial topography as shown 
in the empty valleys west of MacMurdo Sound. Fur- 
thermore, five winters have been spent in the latter 
vicinity and full weather data obtained for a region as 
far south as 78° S. 

There still remains nine-tenths of the continent to 
be explored and more than half the coast line (see Fig- 
ure 34). The outstanding problem of the region be- 
tween the Pole and the Weddell Sea—is it lowland, 
gulf, or high plateau?—is still unsolved. But apart 
from this, we may perhaps say that there are not likely 
to be so many novel polar environments still unknown 
as were investigated in the “Golden Period of South 
Polar Exploration” from I9go0I to 1912. Perhaps one 
should extend this period to include the Australasian 


62 


RECENT EXPEDITIONS TO THE ANTARCTIC 


expedition led by Sir Douglas Mawson during the 
years 1912 and 1913, and the voyage of Filchner in 
Ig12 to the head of the Weddell Sea. But as I have 
stated previously, the conquest of the Pole in 1911-12 
seemed a momentous event which separated earlier ex- 
peditions from all which took place in later years. 


MAWSON 


In December, 1911, the ship “Aurora” set sail 
from Hobart with Mawson and his expedition on 
board. He hoped to have four parties at far distant 
bases, whose meteorological results could be compared. 
Three of these were actually established. The first 
was placed on Macquarie Island, which lies some nine 
hundred miles southeast of Hobart. Here Ainsworth, 
from the Melbourne Weather Bureau, and four com- 
panions maintained wireless communication with Aus- 
tralia. Valuable geological and biological collections 
were also gathered on this sub-Antarctic island. 

Twenty-six men, largely young graduates from Aus- 
tralian universities, were landed at Commonwealth Bay 
in Adelie Land (in latitude 67° S. longitude 143° E.) 
on January 8th (see Figure 2). Here a rocky “oasis” 
amid the encircling ice was discovered on which the 
hut was erected. This patch of rocks was only about 
a mile long, and no similar area seems to exist along 
the hundreds of miles of coast explored by Mawson’s 
Expedition. The ‘Aurora,’ under Captain Davis, 
sailed west to land the party of men under Wild. On 
the twenty-fourth of January high land was sighted 
(near longitude 135° E.) to which Mawson gave the 

63 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


name of Wilkes Land. Totten Land seems to have 
been wrongly placed by Balleny if it exists. On Feb- 
ruary 7th Davis found his progress blocked, as had 
Wilkes, by the great ice shelf of Termination Land. 
But he considered that an open sea might lie to leeward 
and was rewarded for his acumen by discovering Davis 
Sea. Here he landed Wild on February 15th in Queen 
Mary’s Land some 1,200 miles west of Adelie Land. 
(See Figure 25.) 

The expedition encountered an environment of bliz- 
zards far more violent than in any other polar region. 
The average wind force for the year was fifty miles an 
hour, more than five times that experienced in the 
United States. In spite of this disability many re- 
markable journeys were made. On November oth 
Mawson with Ninnis and Mertz started on their trav- 
erse to the east over the margin of the great Ice 
Plateau. They found their route crossed by two tre- 
mendous glaciers which projected far into the sea as 
the Mertz and Ninnis ice tongues. These were fifty 
miles apart and gave rise to terribly crevassed country. 
On December 13th they had sledged two hundred and 
eighty miles. Mawson and Mertz were ahead when 
Ninnis with his dog team and nearly all the food was 
engulfed in a-tremendous crevasse. Only ten days’ 
food remained for the two men and nothing for the 
dogs. They turned back, on a more southern track, 
hoping thus to escape many of the crevasses. Mertz 
rapidly weakened, and on the seventh of January he 
became delirious and died. Mawson was still one hun- 
dred miles from the hut, and his march has never been 


64 


pee ts EX PRDITIONS TO THE ANTARCTIC 


surpassed for difficulty and endurance. On the seven- 
teenth he fell completely into a crevasse and only with 
the utmost difficulty managed to reach his sledge. 
Thereafter he carried a rope ladder to enable him to 
climb out of any future crevasses. When five miles 
from the hut he was held up in a small ice cave for 
seven days, but he reached headquarters safely on the 
eighth of February, 1913. (See Figure 2.) 

A party of three men under Lieutenant Bage jour- 
neyed toward the Magnetic Pole and covered a dis- 
tance of about three hundred miles before turning 
back. They reached within about one hundred and 
seventy-five miles of David’s position in 1909, careful 
magnetic observations being made by Webb (see Fig- 
ure 2). They obtained a dip of 89° 43’ with the needle 
and estimated that they were only fifty miles from the 
Magnetic Pole. The Ice Plateau was here 5,900 feet 
above the sea. A fine coastal journey over the dan- 
gerous sea-ice was made by Madigan and two comrades 
to the east. They found a number of outcrops of 
gneiss and crossed the tongues projecting from the 
Mertz and Ninnis glaciers. In spite of the risk of the 
ice breaking away, they proceeded eighty miles to the 
east and discovered Horn Bluff, where dolerite sills 
penetrate a sandstone resembling the Beacon sandstone. 
(See Figure 2.) 

The western party, under Wild, built their hut just 
a few miles north of the Antarctic Circle on the ice 
shelf named after Shackleton. In August, Ig912, a 
depot was laid twenty miles to the east amid granite 
outcrops. In this region men were lifted from the 


65 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


ground by the blizzards and flung twenty feet. One 
party endured a blizzard which held them in their tents 
for seventeen days. In November Wild led a party 
to the east, where two great glaciers entering the 
Shackleton Ice Shelf were discovered and named the 
Denman and Scott glaciers. Immense chasms four 
hundred feet deep prevented their progress to the east. 
Another party under Jones marched west for two 
hundred miles, and on December 22nd they reached 
the Gaussberg, where relics of the German expedition 
of 1902 were found. The party was relieved on Feb- 
ruary 22nd, 1913, and taken back to Australia. (Fig- 
ure 25.) 

Mawson had not returned in time to be relieved at 
Commonwealth Bay, missing the “Aurora” after his 
terrible journey by a few hours only. With six com- 
panions he carried on work during a second winter. 
On February 15th wireless contact was made with 
Macquarie Island, and on February 22nd messages 
were sent to Australia. On December 12th the 
“Aurora” returned and picked up the remainder of 
the expedition. On her cruises the “Aurora” had 
done much oceanographical work and Davis discovered 
Mill Rise—a submerged mountain, some two hundred 
and fifty miles south of Tasmania. 


FILCHNER 


Filchner in command of a German expedition suc- — 
ceeded in establishing a record in the Weddell Sea, 
which so far has not been broken. He left Grytviken 
in South Georgia on the eleventh of December, 1911, 


66 


RECENT EXPEDITIONS TO THE ANTARCTIC 


and after being held up for a time in the pack ice he 
made rapid progress to the south down the east side 
of the Weddell Sea (see Figure 7). Apparently this 
region is at times kept fairly free of ice, owing to 
the dominant easterly winds. On the thirtieth of 
January he saw the Continental Ice in latitude 76° 48’. 
Ice cliffs about sixty feet high bounded an ice cap 
margin some eight hundred or one thousand feet high. 
He followed this coast to 78° when he was blocked by 
an ice shelf like that in the Ross Sea (see Figure 7). 
This is named after Filchner and the bight at the 
junction after Captain Vahsel, who died six months 
later on the ship. Filchner followed this barrier over 
one hundred miles to the west. He attempted to make 
his winter quarters near the barrier, but on February 
18th a high tide broke the ice loose, and he lost much 
of his material. On the eighth of March his ship was 
beset in 73° 43’ S. by the pack ice, and drifted to the 
northwest. In the last week of June Filchner with 
two companions made a sledge journey of one hundred 
miles to the northwest to see if Morell Land lay in that 
direction (as stated by Morell in 1823). He found 
no sign of land, however. In the autumn months they 
drifted north, and in October the westerly winds north 
of 65° S. drove them irregularly to the northeast. 
They escaped from the pack on the twenty-seventh of 
November in latitude 63° S. Filchner was given no 
opportunity to return to the south, but his voyage is 
especially noteworthy from the discovery of the shelf 
which blocks the head of the Weddell Sea. 
67 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


SHACKLETON, I9QI4 


The most remarkable of all Antarctic voyages as 
regards dangers encountered and vanquished is that 
of Shackleton in the “Endurance.” He planned a 
trans-Antarctic expedition, which involved the land- 
ing from the “Endurance” of a party of men on the 
Filchner Shelf who were to march across the continent 
to depots laid down on the Ross Sea side by sledging 
parties from the “Aurora.” On December 5th, 1914, 
the “Endurance’’ left South Georgia for the Weddell 
Sea and entered the pack near the Sandwich Isles on 
December 7th. The ship made a fair voyage to the 
south through the pack ice and on New Year’s Day 
was just north of 68° S. The explorers were blocked 
by the ice early in January near latitude 70° S., but 
on the 8th reached open water and soon passed the 
record of Ross (1843) and then came in sight of 
Coats Land in 72° 34’ S. They obtained shallow 
soundings here, of 155 fathoms, with a bottom com- 
posed of igneous pebbles (see Figure 7). They dis- 
covered new land (named after Caird) between Coats 
Land and Leopold Land. The most prominent feature 
is a gigantic ice promontory which projects some fifty 
miles from the continent. This mass of ice is fifty 
miles wide and is probably floating, as the sea is 1,300 
fathoms deep hereabouts. Two great glaciers were dis- 
covered just to the south. 

On the eighteenth of January, 1915, the “En- 
durance” was beset off the north end of Leopold Land. 
The whole of February was spent off Vahsel Bay about 

68 


ReCenN TT EXPEDITIONS ‘TO THE ANTARCTIC 


latitude 77°. During March the ship drifted to the 
northwest, and this course was maintained during the 
next three months. The ship’s track made curious 
zigzags first north and then west quite regularly over 
the shallow continental shelf, which lay about two 
hundred fathoms below the surface of the sea. After 
July 1st (latitude 74° S.) the drift was to the north, 
and the effects of pressure on the pack ice became more 
apparent. On August Ist the floe surrounding the 
ship broke up, and the ship listed to starboard. During 
the last days of September the roar of the pressure- 
movements grew louder. On October 18th the “En- 
durance” was thrown over on her side, and on Oc- 
tober 27th, in latitude 69° S., crushed by the driving 
pack. She sank on November 2tst, after a drift of 
some 1,500 miles, leaving the explorers 346 miles from 
Paulet Island, the nearest place where food was avail- 
able (see Figure 7). 

They shifted their stores to a thick old floe forming 
Ocean Camp. They had great difficulty in getting 
enough food from the ship and were always rather 
short of flour and biscuits. In December they at- 
tempted to march nearer land, but were only able to 
proceed seven miles for the ice was too broken for 
travel. They therefore formed Patience Camp on a 
large floe. By the middle of February even the flesh 
foods became short, but luckily they caught a few seals 
and some penguins. On April 2nd all the dogs were 
shot for food. They had now drifted well north of 
Graham Land into latitude 62%2° S. and indeed had 
seen Joinville Island on March 23rd, but the ice was 


69 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


too close-set for boats and too open for sledges. On 
April 8th they saw Clarence Island and Elephant 
Island (latitude 63° S.) and next day they took to the 
three boats for their hazardous trip to Elephant Island. 
At nights they camped on a floe, which broke right 
under them on one occasion, Holness being rescued 
from drowning while in his sleeping bag. The tem- 
perature was close to freezing point, and the men lay 
in each other’s arms for warmth. To add to their 
troubles they had no fresh water, having had no time 
to get fresh ice from a berg when launching the boats. 
As they approached Elephant Island they found it 
flanked by icy cliffs, fragments of which alleviated 
their thirst. On the fifteenth of April they landed on 
the Island, but transferred their camp to a gravel spit 
some seven miles to the west. 

On April 23rd Shackleton with a crew of five made 
an adventurous boat journey of eight hundred miles 
in the stormy seas of the “Furious Fifties’ to South 
Georgia. His journey of sixteen days was one of 
“supreme strife amid heaving waters.” The boat was 
nearly sunk by a gigantic wave on May sth. After 
they had sighted land, they met with one of the worst 
hurricanes ever experienced by any of the sailors. ‘“The 
wind simply shrieked as it tore the tops off the waves.” 
On May roth they landed on the barren west coast of 
South Georgia. A most dangerous journey of thirty- 
six hours across this mountainous island, which was 
covered with glaciers, crevasses, and rocky arétes, 
brought Shackleton and two of his companions to the 
whaling stations on the east side of South Georgia. 


79 


PEeEN tt EXPEDITIONS TO THE ANTARCTIC 


The last chapter of this Antarctic epic deals with 
Shackleton’s gallant efforts to relieve the twenty-two 
men on Elephant Island. After trying unsuccessfully to 
reach them in the steel whaler “Southern Sky” from 
South Georgia, he made two other equally unsuccessful 
efforts from the Falkland Islands and from Puntas 
Arenas. At last the “Yelcho” succeeded on August 
30th, 1916, finding Wild’s party with only four days’ 
supply of food in hand. 

The Ross Sea party under Captain Macintosh left 
Hobart on December 24th, 1914. Their main object 
was to lay a large depot at 83° S. for the benefit of 
Shackleton should he succeed in crossing the Antarctic 
continent. They reached MacMurdo Sound on Janu- 
ary 16th. After some short journeys to the south, ten 
men united at Cape Evans on June 2nd to spend the 
winter there. Early in October they started to lay 
the main depots to the foot of the Beardmore Glacier 
(see Figure 6). On the twenty-sixth of January they 
reached the site of the final depot and here came across 
some of Scott’s sledges. Early on the return Spencer- 
Smith’s condition became alarming, while Macintosh 
was so weak he had to be dragged on the sledge. Later 
Hayward also became affected badly by scurvy. On 
March oth Smith died and was buried on the Barrier, 
and two days later they reached the 1902 hut on Mac- 
Murdo Sound. They marched 1,561 miles betweer 
September 1st and March 18th, which is a wonderful 
performance under Antarctic conditions. 

On May 8th Macintosh and Hayward tried to cross 
the young sea-ice to the main (1910) hut at Cape 


71 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Evans. They were caught in a blizzard and drowned. 
The “Aurora” had been anchored in the Sound off 
Cape Evans, but on May 6th, 1915, the ship, helplessly 
fixed in ice, drifted to the north. On June 14th they 
were off Nordenskjold Ice Tongue. Still drifting in 
the pack, they experienced heavy pressure on July 21st 
which smashed the rudder like matchwood. On August 
6th they sighted Cape Adare, and on September 22nd 
were between Oates Land (of which a sketch was 
made) and the Balleny Islands, and for two months 
the ship was still near these islands (see Figure 5). 
For a time Wilkes’ elusive Cape Hudson seemed in 
sight, but later disappeared. A very shallow sounding 
of 194 fathoms was obtained on the Antarctic Circle 
on November 17th. All through December and Janu- 
ary the ship was still beset, and finally broke out of the 
ice on February 12th, about latitude 65° S., and on 
March 14th cleared the last of the pack ice in latitude 
62° 27’ S. She reached New Zealand on April 2nd, 
adding another spectacular voyage to the journals of 
the second Shackleton expedition.’ 

In January, 1917, the “Aurora” under Captain 
Davis (with Shackleton on board) was again at Cape 
Evans and brought back the seven survivors from Ross 
Island. 


CoPE 


On the twelfth of January, 1921, a party of four 
under J. L. Cope, of Shackleton’s former expedition, 


1 See the account and map in the Geographical Journal (Lon- 
don), September, 1921. 


72 


Pecwnt EXPEDITIONS TO THE ANTARCTIC 


was landed by Norwegian whalers at Andvord Bay, 
a little north of Charcot’s bases, in latitude 64° 48’ on 
the west coast of Graham Land (see Figure 7). Their 
object was to cross the mountains and continue the 
exploration of the Weddell coasts south of Nor- 
denskjold’s survey. Unfortunately they were unable 
to scale the glacierized slopes with their sledges and 
dogs. Hence Cope and G. H. Wilkins ? returned to get 
further supplies, while Lester and Bagshawe spent the 
winter in a hut made out of a boat. They stayed there 
for a complete year, but were obviously unable to do 
much more than collect geological specimens in the 
vicinity and keep a simple weather log and tide record. 
On their return they made an interesting survey of 
Deception Island, the headquarters of the whalers in 
West Antarctica.° 


SHACKLETON, 1921 


Sir Ernest Shackleton’s last expedition started late 
in 1921 in the “Quest,” a small ship of only 125 tons. 
He planned to explore the coasts which lie south of 
Africa, of which only the small region discovered by 
Biscoe in 1831 had been charted. Trouble with the 
engines and gear was experienced all the way to South 
Georgia. Here Sir Ernest died very suddenly on the 
fourth of January, 1922, and his grave was dug 
on the icy slopes above the whaling station of 
Grytviken, where he finished his perilous traverse 
in May, 1916. Captain Frank Wild now became 


2Later Sir Hubert Wilkins. 
3 See Geographical Journal, September, 1923. 


73 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


leader. On January 17th they sailed eastward and 
entered the pack, between Coats Land and Enderby 
Land, in longitude 15° 21’ E. The ‘Quest’? pushed 
south against heavy difficulties until February 12th 
when they reached 69° 17’ S. Here a sounding of 
1,089 fathoms was obtained. They were unable to 
proceed farther in their small boat and returned across 
the Weddell Sea to South Georgia on April 6th. 


WILKINS, 1928-29 * 


Just as the years 1841 and 1903 were wonderful years 
in Antarctic exploration, so December 20th, 1928, was 
the most wonderful day, for in ten hours Sir Hubert 
Wilkins settled more problems and sketched more new 
coast lines than any other expedition had accomplished 
in West Antarctica. He had been twice before in Ant- 
arctic waters, once with Cope in 1920 and again with 
Shackleton in 1922, and was well known for his re- 
markable flight across the North Polar region. In 
November, 1928, he reached Deception Island on the 
whaler “Hektoria’” with two Lockheed-Vega mono- 
planes. Lieutenant Eielson with three others consti- 
tuted his party. They hoped to use the sea-ice of the 
drowned crater as a runway, but it was found to be 
abnormally thin. They therefore cleared a runway half 
a mile long on land over the volcanic ash (see Figures 


Aandv7y) 


4 These accounts of the work accomplished by the Wilkins and 
the Byrd expeditions are based mainly upon the articles in the 
Geographical Review for April and July, 1929. See also Joerg’s 
Brief History, 1930. 


74 


Peer NT EXPEDITIONS TO. THE ANTARCTIC 


At 8:20 a.m. on December 20th they were headed 
for the south and at 9:50 were crossing the flat plateau 
of Graham Land between Bransfield Strait and Dry- 
galski Bay. Several great fiords were discovered en- 
tering this bay which were named the Hektoria Fiords. 
Soon below them were the giant crevasses of the 
Nordenskjold Shelf “broad bottomless yawning blue 
abysses . . . into which our machine could have fallen 
and left no trace.” Exactly on the Antarctic Circle 
lies Crane Channel, a circuitous strait which apparently 
divides Graham Land into two parts and opens on the 
west into Matha Bay. (The writer suggests Wilkins 
Land as a more suitable name than South Graham 
Land for this southern island.) To the south of this 
channel the rocks appeared to contain seams of coal 
near latitude 67° S. A mighty mass of mountains 
was named after the Lockheed Company, and at lati- 
tude 69° 30’ S. they reached a broad channel some 
seventy-five miles across, which was nearly filled by 
the large Scripps Island in the north and the group 
of small Finley Isles in the south. “A smooth slope, 
wide and unbroken, reached southward. We called the 
strait Stefansson Strait and the land beyond it Hearst 
Land. The edge of Hearst Land, which we believe 
to be part of the great Antarctic continent, was dis- 
tinguishable to the eye by a comparatively low ice 
cliff, which failed to show in the photograph. To the 
east . . . the edge was marked with a few small low 
nunataks . . . far beyond in the dim distance I could 
see huge tabular icebergs, and concluded that they must 
have been at one time afloat.’’ Their furthest point was 


75 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


estimated to be about latitude 71° 20’ S. and longitude 
64° 15’ W. 

On the return they met with south winds at first, 
then winds from the east, and then they entered a calm 
belt. They landed safely at Deception Island after an 
epoch-making journey of 600 miles each way, the whole 
being accomplished in ten hours. A flight of 250 miles 
on January 10th, 1929, confirmed the data obtained in 
the northern portion of their earlier flight. In Decem- 
ber, 1929, Wilkins flew south from his ship over Char- 
cot Island, and was able to define 300 miles of coast. 
This is shown approximately on Figure 7. 


Byrp, 1928-30 


On December 25th, 1928, Commander Richard E. 
Byrd’ (like Wilkins, famed for his North Polar 
flights) reached the Ross Ice Shelf with a large expedi- 
tion prepared to stay two years. He fixed his 
headquarters near the Bay of Whales but some- 
what to the east of Framheim. Commander Byrd was 
supplied with several aeroplanes for which this site, 
the calmest so far known in the Antarctic, is particu- 
larly well suited. On the twenty-eighth of January, 
1920, the first long flight was carried out to the north- 
east along the Barrier edge (see Figure 6). Scott’s 
Nunataks and the Alexandra Mountains were sighted, 
and also King Edward Land, which may perhaps be an 
island. About fifty miles west by south from Scott’s 
Nunataks a new range was discovered and named Rocke- 


5 Now Rear-Admiral Byrd. 
76 


recent EXPEDITIONS ‘TO THE: ANTARCTIC 


feller Range. Fourteen peaks of about two thousand 
feet elevation were distinguished. On February 1oth a 
second flight was made to the east, and the Rockefeller 
Range was reached. From here more mountains, per- 
haps ten thousand feet high, could be seen to the east 
beyond the British area (which extends to 150° W. 
longitude) in a region which Byrd claimed for the 
United States and called Marie Byrd Land. To the 
south the land sighted by Amundsen in 81° 30’ was 
seen in the distance. 


The exploits of these last two expeditions show 
clearly how valuable is the aéroplane in polar recon- 
naissance. But there are limits to its uses, for a rapid 
aeroplane survey, without landing, will do little to ex- 
tend the detailed knowledge of the polar environment 
of a kind which I have tried to summarize in the 
present book. Moreover, as I stated in an article 
published in August, 1928, in the London Times, it is 
difficult to see how the aéroplane can be anchored to 
withstand the blizzards, whose chief feature is their 
sudden development and extreme force. Byrd’s expe- 
dition is facing these difficulties. Already one of his 
planes has been destroyed in a blizzard, luckily without 
loss of life. Early in March, 1929, Gould, the geolo- 
gist, with a pilot and radio man, flew to the Rockefeller 
Range to commence a local survey. They had barely 
arrived when a blizzard developed, reaching an esti- 
mated velocity of 120 miles per hour. This tore away 
all the anchors of the plane, and it was dashed to match- 
wood. After ten days’ bad weather Byrd managed to 


77 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


fly out and search for them. He accomplished their 
rescue and two days later all were safe at their camp 
in Little America. However, in spite of this loss of 
one of their planes, the American expedition in 1928 
observed from the air some forty thousand square miles 
of new territory. 


THE FLIGHT TO THE SOUTH POLE 


During November, 1929, Byrd completed his plans 
for flying to the Pole. A geological party under Gould 
had already set out with sledges to the Queen 
Maud Range, which Amundsen had discovered 450 
miles south of Byrd’s base at Little America in 78° 
30’ S. Before describing the flight we may well 
consider some of the difficulties which faced Byrd in 
the air. The Ross Ice Shelf along this route varies in 
height from nine hundred feet near Byrd’s headquar- 
ters on its northern edge, to sixty-three feet just before 
the mountain scarp is reached. In places crevassed 
areas are encountered, especially near latitude 81° S. 
It is, however, in surmounting the great mountain range 
that aviators will always experience great difficulties 
and dangers. Not many scarps are so pronounced as 
that forming the eastern face of the great Antarctic 
Horst. A number of the peaks reach fifteen thousand 
feet and hang like the Himalayas over the plains be- 
neath. The great glaciers which enabled Amundsen to 
reach the plateau rise much higher than the Beard- 
more used by Scott, for the ice divide at the top of 
Liv Glacier and Axel Heiberg Glacier seems to be well 
over ten thousand feet. Thereafter there is a descent 


78 


Poerw ) EXPEDITIONS TO. THE, ANTARCTIC 


to the surface of the “Devil’s Dancing Floor” at 7,600 
feet. Again the icy plateau rises to 10,300 feet in lati- 
tude 88° S. to fall once more to nine thousand at the 
Pole. 

Another great difficulty in Antarctic flying, especially 
in dull weather, is to gain an adequate idea of distance. 
For instance, I have at times been at a loss in Antarctica 
as to whether a snow hollow before me was three feet 
or thirty feet deep. This renders it very difficult to 
make a safe landing with an aeroplane on the icy sur- 
faces of the southern continent. The greatest difficulty 
is naturally due to the sudden changes in wind velocity, 
and my own experiences may be worth recording. 
Thus, on the last day of May in 1911 there had been 
a perfect calm for several hours. Within ten minutes 
the wind rose to a howling gale of forty or fifty miles 
an hour. Nearly as rapid a rise occurred a few months 
later on the first of September. Lastly, there are 
special difficulties in navigation in flights near the 
South Pole. It is, of course, only possible by astro- 
nomical measurements to tell when the South Pole is 
attained. It is merely an unmarked spot on an illimit- 
able ice plateau. Moreover, at the South Pole, all 
routes lead north, and a slight error in returning will 
land the aviator in the wrong section of Antarctica. 
Furthermore, at the South Pole “time’’ has a special 
meaning since here all lines of longitude meet. Thus, 
if the aviator flies around the Pole, he theoretically 
passes through twenty-four hours of time, though it 
may take him only as many minutes. 

Food for three months and sledging equipment to 


79 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


give the party a chance of return were placed on board. 
On November 18th Byrd had made a depot of fuel and 
food at the foot of the Queen Maud Range in 85° 
of latitude. Finally, on November 28th the local 
meteorologists at Little America and also wireless in- 
formation from Gould, then approaching the moun- 
tains, indicated fair weather. At 3:29 p.m. Byrd set 
out on his most hazardous flight. The great Ford 
plane passed over Gould’s sledges at 8:15, dropping 
mail to them. His plane was so heavily laden that it 
was not expedient to climb above twelve thousand feet, 
and obviously he had not much margin in crossing the 
ice divide at eleven thousand feet. On reaching the 
great scarp Byrd decided to attempt the valley occupied 
by the Liv Glacier, which lies just to the west of the 
Axel Heiberg Glacier used by Amundsen. As they 
climbed between the giant walls of the cafion it was 
found necessary to lighten the plane. Byrd, accord- 
ingly, risked his safe return and threw overboard nearly 
half the store of food. He was flying only about three 
hundred feet above the crevassed glacier. By mid- 
night they had safely reached the plateau and were 
approaching the South Pole last attained by Scott’s 
ill-fated party of five in January, 1912. Around 1:30 
A.M. Byrd cruised about the Pole in order to be sure 
of covering the exact region. In returning Byrd had 
two checks on his direction. He could use the sun 
compass, which was based on the known position of 
the sun at the time of observation. He could also use 
the magnetic compass, which was fairly reliable at that 
distance from the South Magnetic Pole. The south- 
80 


RECENT EXPEDITIONS TO THE ANTARCTIC 


seeking end of the needle pointed, of course, to the 
latter and so picked out one “north direction” out of 
the infinite number radiating from the South Pole. 

On the return they could fly higher and reached 
thirteen thousand feet. As they approached the “up- 
thrust block” of the Queen Maud Range, they saw 
towering mountains to the east which seemed to reach 
twenty thousand feet. However, Captain McKinley’s 
mosaic of aérial photographs should help to decide this 
matter. Byrd descended by the Axel Heiberg Glacier, 
meeting with dangerous air eddies and currents. At 
4:33 A.M. he landed at the depot on the Ross Ice 
Shelf at sea level, and here spent an hour refueling the 
plane. On rising he made a detour to the east, cover- 
ing new ground and helping to fix the eastern limit of 
the great Ross Ice Shelf. The Charles Bob Mountains 
in latitude 83° 30’ were more closely surveyed and then 
Byrd headed for Little America, where he landed safely 
at 10:10 A.M. on the twenty-ninth of November. His 
wonderful journey of 1,600 miles had only occupied 
nineteen hours and had made him the flying conqueror 
of both the North and South Poles. 

Dr. Gould, the geologist with Byrd, made some re- 
markable discoveries on his sledging journey in Decem- 
ber, 1929. Mount Fridjof Nansen stands between the 
lower slopes of the Heiberg and Liv glaciers. Gould 
climbed up 6,000 feet, and found the cap-rocks to con- 
sist of Beacon Sandstone with carbonaceous layers. 
Sledging eastward he demonstrated that there is no 
Carmen Land as Amundsen supposed (see Figure 10). 
Hence there may be a strip of low land or even in parts 


SI 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


sea-ice connecting Ross Sea with the Weddell Sea. 
(The writer suggested this on his map in the Geograph- 
ical Journal, November, 1914, p. 366.) 


Mawson, 1929-1930 


Sir Douglas Mawson is in command of an expedition 
whose main purpose is to explore the shallow seas and 
coasts south of the Indian Ocean. Captain John King 
Davis is in charge of the ship, which is Scott’s old 
vessel the “Discovery.” They left Cape Town on Octo- 
ber 19th, 1929, and called at the Crozet group and 
then at Kerguelen and Heard islands. On December 
20th the ship crossed the Antarctic Circle in 73° E. 
On the last day of the year she was on the Circle in 
65° E. longitude, and here the scout aeroplane was 
put in use. Land could be seen about fifty miles to 
the south, flanked by a narrow belt of open water. The 
explorations are still in progress. A full equipment 
for sounding and dredging is carried, including an echo 
sounding machine.°® 


6 Based on W. L. Joerg’s Brief History of Polar Exploration 
(New York, 193c). (This deals with Polar flights only.) 


CHAPTER. V 


THE CONTINENT, ITS GEOLOGY AND 
RELATION TO OTHER LANDS 


BuILp oF ANTARCTICA 


N the writer’s opinion no theory concerning the 

general arrangement of the continents is so sug- 
gestive as that propounded by Lowthian Green * in 1875 
and strongly supported by J. W. Gregory’ in 1899. 
I refer to the Tetrahedral Theory, which seeks to show 
that the earth is a flattened sphere (geoid) slightly 
modified toward the shape of a tetrahedron or pyramid. 
The antipodal arrangement of land and sea, shown by 
more than go per cent of the land surface, was ex- 
plained by this theory long before we knew anything 
at all about the condition of the surface at the poles. 
It was Scott’s expedition as late as 1902 which revealed 
the fact that the Antarctic area consisted essentially of 
a gigantic plateau, and it was only by Nansen’s drift 
in the “Fram” (1893-96) and Peary’s soundings near 
the Pole (1902-1909) that the equally interesting 
phenomenon of a deep Arctic ocean could be demon- 
strated (see Figure 9). Thus the essential feature of 
the “World Plan” is clearly this fact of antipodal ar- 


1 Lowthian Green, Vestiges of the Molten Globe (London, 1875). 
2J. W. Gregory, “Plan of the Earth,’ Geographical Journal, 


1899. 
83 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


rangement, whereby the lands and seas are opposed, as 
indicated in the following table: 


Antarctica opposite Arctic Ocean 
Eur-A frica “ Pacific Ocean 
America p Indian Ocean 
Australia-E. Asia ? Atlantic Ocean 


The narrow southern portion of South America is 
the only notable exception to the general rule. Hobbs ® 
has pointed out that if we add the drowned continental 
margins, then the land areas are increased by ten mil- 
lion square miles, and in some respects the antipodal 
arrangement is emphasized. Around Antarctica the 
continental shelf presents some special features, show- 
ing evidence of greater drowning than usual, as we 
shall see in a later chapter. On the other hand, the 
Arctic Ocean is surrounded by a remarkably broad 
and shallow series of shelf seas. It may be mentioned 
that when a hollow glass sphere is blown by the glass- 
maker it has a strong tendency to collapse to a per- 
ceptible tetrahedral shape as it contracts on cooling. 
Something of this sort may have given rise to the plan 
of the earth. It is clear that the mobile waters of the 
oceans would accumulate on the “faces” of the tetra- 
hedron, since here the gravity pull is greatest. So also 
the projecting edges of the tetrahedron would con- 
stitute the main land masses. This is possibly the basis 
of the ring of lands round the Arctic Ocean, and of the 
three south-pointing land masses of Eur-Africa, Amer- 


3'W. H. Hobbs, Earth Evolution (New York, 1921). 
84 


THE CONTINENT 


ica and Austral-Asia. It also accounts for the ring of 
oceanic waters surrounding the Antarctic Plateau. 

Let us now consider where Antarctica fits in among 
the continents as regards structure (see Figure 9). 


ov e = 
—— 


S 
S OBS 
AUT y, chief Pla, 


My 
MU Ty. 
NN It ra ¢ 


peas 


“<= 


SHI 


~ 


> 


Fic. 9.—SYMMETRY OF THE WORLD ABOUT AN AXIS OF 
EPEIROGENIC (EN MASSE) UPLIFT, FROM ANTARCTICA 
THROUGH AFRICA TO GREENLAND. (ON MOLLWEIDE 
EguaL AREA PROJECTION WITH ANTARCTICA ADDED. ) 


Note the order of the structures: (1) axis; (2) shield; (3) 
down-warp; (4) folds; (5) oceanic deeps. 


W. M. Davis* has long ago pointed out that North 
America and Eur-Asia have many features in common, 
but arranged more or less symmetrically on each side 
of the Atlantic Ocean. Thus the Laurentian Shield 


4W. M. Davis, International Geography, London, 1903. 
85 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


(¢ purleoz 
MON pue ) 
spue[ys!H 


seAeleull Fy 
pue sdjv 


SLIITd() 
LV] 


auI[IUAS 
Aelinyy pue | uelypessny 
ULISIAV 159M 
UPIIIqIS ueIAeU 
-ubISSNYy -Ipueosg 
NIV1Tg 
dav 
-NMOQ aTalHS 


‘spuey jo] pure YS oy} JO ‘1011 © UL UOTIHorL Ss} pue pofqo uv 


nvoje] J 
oo1eyUY 


neo}e] J 
UII 


INANILNO) 
INVLSISAY 


IVULNAD 


yO S}stsuod sydiowonueus jo ated & yong , 


Lo Po Fat 
uUeITIZeIg OOULIC) sopuy 
asaydsita FT 
UAIY INOS 
ueIyUIINe'T SOLMCI SOTYIOY 
asaydsiuta FT 
UAIY AO NT 
NIVTg 
Cav MA | SLAITA() 
aTaIHS -NMOC aLV’] 


* SHAUOWOILNVNA GTYOM AHL AO ATAVL 


86 


THE CONTINENT 


parallels the Scandinavian Shield. The Great Lakes 
are like the Baltic Sea and Lakes. The Appalachian 
Mountains resemble the Hercynian chain in Europe. 
The great mountain arcs of the West Indies are akin 
in time and shape to those surrounding the Mediter- 
ranean Sea, etc., etc. These two continents are there- 
fore closely allied. Perhaps we may compare the 
southeast of Asia, with its huge plateau, block faults, 
mountain arcs and festoon islands, with the western 
portion of North America. 

Far different from these is the solid resistant block 
of Africa, with barely a sign of late folding through- 
out its vast extent. It lies perhaps at the other extreme 
of continental ‘build.’ Australia and South America 
form another pair, somewhat symmetrical about the 
Pacific Ocean. Thus the great Brazilian Shield may be 
equated with the Western Shield in Australia. The 
long geosyncline (down-warp) from Adelaide north 
to the Gulf of Carpenteria resembles the lowland belt 
from Buenos Ayres to the Orinoco; the humble East- 
ern Highlands of Australia with their drowned neigh- 
bors to the east are due to crustal ripples probably 
moving outward from the Pacific, just as are the giant 
ranges of the Andean Cordillera. We can perhaps 
show this secondary symmetrical aspect of the world 
plan in tabular form. (See Figure 10.) 

I have ventured to insert Antarctica in the above 
table as a continent more akin to Africa than any of 
the other continents, and like it, to some extent, lying 
between, though to the south of, associated pairs of 
enantiomorphs. Just as we find Africa characterized 


87 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


ARTESIAN E.AUSTRA 
SYNCLINE one oe 


H 
ie STS 


Pe 


V CITI OS 
SHACKLETON 
SHELF y_ 


SUBMARINE 
PLATEAU 


' Extension 
of shelf 


ATLANTIC 
OCEAN 


> 
SANDWICH pos 
GROUP /o8 
Vy, ~=- 

Wii 


tA” 


TRENCH 
8000 ™. \ 


S.GEORG 


Fic. 10.—GENERALIZED DIAGRAM ILLUSTRATING THE SA- 
LIENT FEATURES IN THE “BUILD” OF ANTARCTICA AND 
ADJACENT CONTINENTS. 


Gould’s discovery (Dec., 1929) of the extension of the Ross 
Ice Shelf is indicated. 


by high plateaus and by great fault scarps, with only 
a fringe of earth ripples in one corner (Morocco, etc.), 


so also Antarctica is preéminently a great plateau 
88 


THE CONTINENT 


bounded in places by great fault scarps, and only in one 
segment, Graham Land, exhibiting anything like the 
characteristic foldings of the late Tertiary crustal 
buckles. Moreover, Wilkins’ recent exploration seems 
to show that this Antarc-Andean folding of Graham 
Land dies away at latitude 70° against the low plateau 
of Hearst Land. On the other hand, there may be 
a line of folded ranges extending from South America 
to New Zealand which have been crumpled from the 
Pacific against the solid resistant shield of East Ant- 
arctica. It is precisely in this region between the 
Weddell Sea and Edward VII Land that we know so 
little. We have some assurance for believing that the 
African and Australian quadrants of Antarctica form 
one solid Plateau Shield (see Figure 10). The Ameri- 
can quadrant includes a great drowned mountain range 
akin in origin to the Andes. But what is the build 
of the hypothetical Pacific quadrant, most of which is 
entirely unknown from Charcot Land to Edward VII 
Land? It is an interesting speculation, but worth 
suggesting, as I did in 1914, that the West Australian 
Shield, the Australian Horst,® the Tasman Sea and New 
Zealand are to be equated with similar structures in 
the South. These are the Great Ice Plateau (shield?) 
of East Antarctica, the South Victoria Horst, the 
Ross-Weddell depression and the Graham Land— 
Edward Land Folds. 

Geology.—In two regions only has there been ade- 
quate mapping and collecting of the geological data. 
These two areas are those to the west and southwest 


5 Horst: An elevated crustal block bounded by scarps. 


89 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


of the Ross Sea, and the islands in the vicinity of 
Graham Land. It is a curious and gratifying fact that 
the two localities are largely complementary. Thus the 
Ross area is rich in Paleozoic rocks and fossils, but 
offers little to help in the deciphering of Mesozoic and 
Tertiary deposits, while Graham Land has a fine 
sequence of rocks of precisely these ages. 
Summary.—The accompanying geological sections 
(see Figure 11) show in a somewhat generalized fash- 
ion the main features of Antarctic geology. They are 
both due to Sir Edgeworth David. Commencing with 
the section across MacMurdo Sound (in East Ant- 
arctica) we see that the basal portion of the continent 
here consists of granites, gneisses, and other meta- 
morphic rocks such as various schists. Probably this 
series of rocks is more or less universal throughout 
Antarctica. The oldest sedimentary rocks of which 
we have much data are limestones of the Cambrian 
Age, in which the writer was able to identify the coral- 
loid organisms Archeocyathine in 1910. These fossils 
have since been found near the Beardmore Glacier in 
I9gII and in rocks dredged from the Weddell Sea.°® 
Above the Cambrian limestones is a tremendous series 
of nearly level-bedded sandstones and shales which 
extend probably throughout later Paleozoic time and 
quite probably into early Mesozoic time without much 
deformation or great breaks in the sequence. This 
is the remarkable Beacon Sandstone formation which 
probably extends from Mount Nansen (85° S.) and 


6W. T. Gordon, Archeocyathine from the Weddell Sea (Roy. 
Soc., Edin., 1920, pp. 681-714). 


go 


THE CONTINENT 


(preg “A 'M “NL Jee yIog) 
“VOILOUVINY SSOUOV SNOILOUS TVOIDOTOU*)— 11 “OILY 


SD1qIUeYUYy 


yse J ssousy 


é Mig Ye, \+ ate NL eee ee 
auoys pues Didar Fie uoseae 8: 
ae uoseay:. ¥ /°q ey . sci o ahs 


EER e! Po, SS: SA Catae te eden erate Ag 
é su ae SS =] ie 
— a>) Oy 


? 
Srey — Punos Opan de 
e” [I'S 11¢ Wp 


~~ 


SWRA JeOD 
= aie OIL oVN > —» 


SaIW OF 


VdIZDUeJUY ISOM 
ssoi9e uoiz2a¢ 
1zewwesbeig 


SS 


pue7 weyes9 ‘S| Uolqdor0q 4yynosg 


OURDIOA spueljays 
YON 


LSAIM 


gI 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


the Beardmore Glacier right across to the Weddell Sea. 
It contains Devonian fish, Permian ferns and probably 
Triassic tree remains. No further deposits of impor- 
tance occur in the MacMurdo region, though there are 
many eruptive rocks which will be described later. 

On the American side of Antarctica in the vicinity of 
Snow Hill, there are basal rocks of granite and gneiss 
which are capped by Jurassic shales and sandstones 
containing many fossil plants. Above these are ma- 
rine Cretaceous beds, and lower Miocene sediments 
with fossil penguins and fossil leaves of trees allied 
to the beech and giant conifers (Sequoia) of Cali- 
fornia. In this same richly endowed district are late 
Pliocene conglomerates containing Pectens and other 
fossil shells. 


DETAILED GEOLOGY IN EAst ANTARCTICA 


Metamorphic Rocks —H. T. Ferrar showed in 
1901-4 that the coast line of South Victoria Land from 
Granite Harbor to the Koettlitz Glacier consisted of 
a foundation series of metamorphic rocks. Towards 
the plateau the great glacial valleys rise so rapidly that 
the basal rocks are soon hidden beneath the later sedi- 
mentary and igneous rocks. No good junctions of 
metamorphic and later sedimentary rocks have been 
observed. To the south of New Harbor the meta- 
morphics form the tops of hills at five thousand feet, 
but to the northward their summits appear to be about 
one thousand feet above sea level. They are older 
than the granites, for fragments are often included in 
the latter. (See Figure 8.) 


Q2 


THE CONTINENT 


Crystalline limestones, coarse and of a white color, 
are the most noteworthy of these metamorphics. They 
occur at Heald Island, where they are eight hundred 
feet thick, and at Salmon Hill, north of Davis Glacier, 
they are about five thousand feet thick and dip steeply 
to the northeast. Another good example occurs near 
the Suess Glacier in Taylor Valley. Here I “washed” 
in a miner’s dish the débris at the junction of this 
limestone with augen-gneiss, in the vain hope that some 
gold might be present. These limestones are rich in 
chondrodite‘ and spinel. In Granite Harbor Deben- 
ham also found similar limestones. 

Pyroxene granulites were found included in granite, 
at Granite Harbor and elsewhere, as erratics all along 
the west coast of the Ross Sea. Hornblende schists 
seem to be associated with them. Tilley has described 
a rock from Eyre’s Peninsula in South Australia of 
similar character which is due to the metamorphism of 
impure dolomites. A similar origin is likely in Ant- 
arctica. 

Crystalline Schists——These occur with a thickness 
of two thousand feet in Heald Island where muscovite- 
schists rich in graphite are common. Many other out- 
crops occur in the Kukri Hills and nearby, where a 
garnet-sillimanite-schist is common. In places lenticles 
of biotite amphibolite probably represent metamor- 
phosed basic dykes. (See Figure 8.) 

Gneisses.—These rocks grade into gray granites in 
very many localities in South Victoria Land. They 


7 Chondrodite is a fluo-silicate of magnesium, somewhat re- 
sembling olivine. 


23 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


may represent intrusions into the limestone series, and 
may have given rise to the chondrodites mentioned 
earlier. 

David and Priestley believe these rocks to be pre- 
Cambrian in age, since the Cambrian limestone of the 
Beardmore Glacier with Archeocyathus is quite un- 
metamorphosed and therefore presumably younger 
than the crystalline limestones. Further, the granu- 
lites are like those of Brittany, which are considered 
to be pre-Cambrian, and are so like the series from 
South Australia that they may be considered to be of 
the same pre-Cambrian age. Near Terra Nova Bay 
(latitude 75° S.) Priestley found rocks of much the 
same type, mostly in moraines but sometimes im situ. 
It is clear that the glaciers cut through a basement 
series of metamorphic rocks, chiefly biotite-gneiss, 
granulites, or graphitic mica-schists. 

Slate Graywackes.—In the region of Robertson Bay, 
near Cape Adare, in latitude 69° S. Priestley has de- 
scribed a series of sediments which differ very con- 
siderably from those found so far in other parts of 
the Ross Sea area, or even in Mawson’s area to the 
northwest. The oldest rocks near Cape Adare appear 
to be a series of sediments ranging from fine-grained 
slates to a coarse graywacke.* They are of a greenish- 
gray color. The main cleavage lines run north and 
south, and the bedding is indistinct. The series is 
thrown into anticlines and synclines, the axes of which 
are approximately meridional, and has been observed 


8 Graywacke is a cemented aggregate of small fragments of 
quartz, slate, etc. 


04 


THE CONTINENT 


in situ for some thirty miles along the west of Robert- 
son Bay. These rocks present characteristics usually 
associated with Paleozoic or Algonkian sediments, and 
resemble the Ingleton series of Yorkshire to some ex- 
tent. The grains of the rocks appear to be angular, 
indicating frost-shattering, but they are evenly graded, 
which to some extent suggests wind rather than ice. 
Priestley suggests that they are shore deposits laid down 
in a dry cold climate, under conditions like those at 
present prevailing in parts of the polar regions. 
Cambrian Limestones.—On Shackleton’s journey on 
the Beardmore Glacier, in 1908 and 1909, some frag- 
ments of a limestone breccia were obtained about eight 
miles south of Mount Hope (latitude 84° S.). This 
was examined in Australia in 1910, and then handed 
over to me, since it seemed to contain fossils belong- 
ing to the Archeocyathine family. It is a curious 
coincidence that I should have spent 1908 and 1909 
at Cambridge University studying these fossils (from 
a huge fossil coral reef in South Australia) just before 
my two years’ experience of Antarctic conditions. The 
sketch appended (see Figure 12) shows that these 
organisms resembled corals in structure, while they 
were somewhat spongelike in general form. Three or 
four genera (and several species of one genus) were 
identifiable. In 1911 Wright (on the last Scott ex- 
pedition) collected a finer specimen of Archeocyathus 
from somewhat the same locality. No fossils have 
been found in situ of this age, but David is of the 
opinion that the original limestones may occur in basal 
beds of the huge Beacon Sandstone Formation. Some 


95 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


such occurrence was described by Shackleton’s party 
from Buckley Island (latitude 85° S.) at the head 
of the Beardmore Glacier. Debenham, however, thinks 
Mount Bell (84° S.) is a more likely locality.° Below 
the summit of Mount Nansen (latitude 75°) there ap- 


Fic. 12.—GOMPHOCEPHALUS, THE LARGEST ANIMAL OF 

ANTARCTICA (I MILLIMETER LONG). BELow: ARCHEO- 

CYATHUS, THE OLDEST FOSSIL IN ANTARCTICA, WHERE 
DWARF FORMS, A FEW MILLIMETERS WIDE, OCCUR. 


peared to be limestones older than the Beacon Sand- 
stone, which David suggests may also be of the Cam- 
brian Age. They are present in Coats Lands, as we 
shall see later. 

Beacon Sandstone.—The structure of the whole 
“horst”’ block, which bounds the Ross Sea and the 


9 Sedimentary Rocks of South Victoria Land (British Museum, 


1921). 
96 


THE CONTINENT 


Ross Ice Shelf on the west, consists of a series of 
tabular mountains. 


Their horizontal structure is due to the level-bedded 
character of the main sedimentary formation of sandstone, 
which has been stiffened by massive intrusions of a later 
dolerite in the form of very extensive sills. Since the base 
of this formation has been proved to be of Devonian age 
at least, we have to regard the whole area as one of great 
stability and freedom from lateral earth movements. The 
sandstone formation has an enormous extension, for it is 
found in Adelie Land in latitude 68° S. and judging 
from Amundsen’s photographs probably also in latitude 
86° S —DEBENHAM, 1921. 


The sandstone is very uniform in composition, 
though the lower beds in this huge formation are less 
pure as thin beds of limestone and shale are to be 
observed. Apparently the sandstone rests on a level 
surface of granite, but generally the junction is masked 
by intruding sills of dolerite. However, the latter seem 
in places to have lifted the level sandstones bodily off 
the granite. In the scarp below Mount Lister (thirteen 
thousand feet) the sandstone with its included sills of 
dolerite is at least five thousand feet thick. 

Ripple marks and sun cracks seem to indicate shal- 
low lakes or pools during sedimentation. The cement 
is either calcareous or siliceous or even bituminous in 
places. Charring of included woody stems is to be 
noticed, but this may be due to the intrusion by the 
dolerite, perhaps in Cretaceous times. 

Coal has been found in the Beardmore outcrops and 


97 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


also by my party near Mount Suess (latitude 77° S.). 
Dr. Gould has reported carbonaceous shales near the 
foot of Liv Glacier. The Mount Suess seams appear 
to occur with dark shales near the base of the sand- 
stones. It is a hard bright coal with a large amount 
of ash. Probably it has been baked by the dolerite 
sills. The Beardmore coal, however, contains 14.5 
per cent of volatile constituents and has not been 
baked to the same extent. Here Frank Wild recorded 
three hundred feet of coal measures containing seven 
seams of coal, from one foot up to seven feet in 
thickness. Fossil wood was obtained in the vicinity in 
1908, which appears to belong to a gymnospermous 
plant, but much finer specimens of fossils were brought 
back by Dr. Wilson in 1912, and found near his body. 

The fish remains collected by Frank Debenham and 
the writer on the moraine below Mount Suess in De- 
cember, I9II, consist of dermal plates and scales. 
They are all isolated and scattered, showing that the 
fishes were disintegrated before burial, but the frag- 
ments are beautifully preserved, and in transparent 
sections their histological structure is perfectly ob- 
servable. The plates appear as whitish or bluish-gray 
patches on the gray rock, and were so polished in some 
cases that the writer was reminded of the elytre of 
beetles. Woodward states that Ostracoderms, Elas- 
mobranchs, Teleostomi and Dipnoi are all represented. 
One specimen, Bothriolepis, is a common Upper De- 
vonian fossil both in Europe and North America. (See 
inset in Figure 6.) 


98 


THE CONTINENT 


Of greater importance still were the fossil speci- 
mens obtained by Scott and Wilson at the head of the 
Beardmore Glacier under Mount Buckley. Here Scott 
wrote on February 8th, 1912, “The moraine was ob- 
viously so interesting that when we got out of the 
wind I decided to camp and spend the rest of the day 
geologizing. We found ourselves under perpendicular 
walls of Beacon Sandstone, weathering rapidly and 
carrying coal seams. From the last Wilson with his 
sharp eyes has picked several pieces of coal with 
beautifully traced leaves in layers.’’ These were speci- 
mens of Glossopteris indica (see Figure 2) which, 
as Seward remarks, is one of the few genera which 
can be identified with confidence from fragmentary 
specimens. Their occurrence only three hundred miles 
from the Pole throws a light on the remarkable changes 
of climate which have occurred in the past history 
of the globe. Seward reconstructs the environment 
as follows: “The granites and gneisses from which 
the material of the Beacon Sandstone was derived, 
were in all probability exposed to the disintegrating 
action of wind-blown sand in a climate sufficiently 
mild to permit of the existence of Glossopteris and 
other plants. Fragments of leaves and twigs with 
larger logs of wood were carried by rivers or marine 
currents and buried in the barren sand that was being 
piled up on the floor of an Antarctic Sea, to be sub- 
sequently uplifted as vast sheets of sedimentary strata, 
which at a later stage were penetrated by the products 
of a widespread volcanic activity.” These latter were 
the enormous dolerite sills already referred to. 


99 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


This genus Glossopteris ranges from Upper Car- 
boniferous to Rhaetic (Upper Triassic) period. Prob- 
ably at Mount Buckley the beds are of Permo-Carbon- 
iferous age just as they occur in the coal measures of 
Australia. At the end of Carboniferous times, en- 
vironments changed all over the world so that the old 
Lepidodendron flora (of Lower Carboniferous days) 
branched into two different types; one without much 
change in the Northern Provinces (Canada, Europe, 
China); and the other developed into the southern 
Glossopteris flora of India and the three southern con- 
tinents. In most of these latter localities glacial de- 
posits are commonly associated with the Glossopteris 
ferns. Marked rings of growth occur in the trees of 
Permo-Carboniferous times, indicating strong changes 
in the seasons during the year. These are absent in the 
Lepidodendron floras. Thus we are led to believe that 
in the southern hemisphere and in India the configura- 
tion of the land favored the growth of glaciers and 
icebergs while in the northern province there were 
extensive swamps and ice-free hills. Seward does not, 
however, think that the paleobotanical evidence is fa- 
vorable to a view involving an alteration in the position 
of the earth’s axis. But he inclines to a belief in an 
Antarctic land on which were evolved the elements of 
a new flora which spread in diverging lines over a 
Paleozoic Continent (generally known as Gondwana- 
land). 

Sir Edgeworth David has endeavored to estimate the 
extent and possible value of the coal reserves in Ant- 
arctica. The Beacon Sandstone is proved to cover 

TOO 


THE CONTINENT 


twelve thousand square miles of available territory, but 
it is unlikely that coal measures are developed through- 
out. Our parties found no coal in the Ferrar-Taylor 
valleys. Possibly a great deal of coal exists under the 
Polar Ice Cap at a lower level than in the South Vic- 
toria Horst, where alone it has been observed so far. 
Probably it lies two or three thousand feet below the 
surface of the ice. If this hypothetical coal field were 
700 miles long by 143 wide, and if the seams were only 
12 feet thick, there are coal reserves here second only 
to those of the United States. (See Figure 11.) 

Granites—We may devote some space to a con- 
sideration of the eruptive rocks in Victoria Land. 
There are several types of granite, each associated with 
various dyke rocks. Gray granite occurs near Mount 
Larsen (latitude 75° S.) and near the Beardmore Gla- 
cier. Mawson thinks this is somewhat older than the 
pink granites, while both are perhaps younger than 
the diorites and gabbros which occur at intervals along 
the same coast. Somewhat similar granites and schists 
characterize Edward VII Land. The gray granites are 
low in lime and magnesia and high in potash and soda. 
This chemical composition of the older granites and 
porphyries is widely different from that of the Pacific 
type, and is essentially an Atlantic type of rock. So 
also the dolerites and Kenytes belong to the same gen- 
eral facies, though the diorites and quartz-dolerites (in 
David’s opinion) have some resemblance to Pacific 
types of rock. David quotes the following differences 
as distinctive: 

IOI 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Atlantic type—microperthitic intergrowths in fel- 
spar, felspathoid minerals, quartz only in acid 
rocks, soda-bearing amphiboles, etc., mica and 
garnets common. 

Pacific type—zoned felspars, no felspathoids, quartz 
in intermediate rocks also, diopside and common 
hornblende abundant, mica not common except in 
the more acid rocks. 


Quartz dolerites, as already stated, occur in the form 
of huge sills, which have penetrated both the granites 
and the Beacon Sandstone series throughout South Vic- 
toria Land. The rock in its amount of potash closely 
approaches to essexite. The commonest pyroxene is 
hypersthene but enstatite is also present. Interstitial 
patches of granophyre are common, and the whole 
facies of the rock resembles that forming the sills of 
Tasmania. The Tasmanian occurrences have intruded 
Trias-Jura rocks and are themselves intruded by ter- 
tiary basalts. The Antarctic quartz-dolerites may 
therefore also be classed provisionally as Cretaceous in 
age. Somewhat similar rocks in South Africa are per- 
haps a little older. The famous Palisades near New 
York are stated by Dr. Prior to be of a very similar 
character. (See Figure 11.) 

Kenytes and Basalts——These volcanic rocks belong 
to a series of Tertiary eruptions, and are found very 
abundantly along the west coast of the Ross Sea, espe- 
cially on Ross Island, which is almost exclusively vol- 
canic in composition. There is a series of trachytes on 
this island consisting often of sanidine and aegyrine. 

102 


THE CONTINENT 


The basalts occur as dykes or flows chiefly on the 
flanks of Mount Erebus and Mount Bird. The same 
series is found also on the mainland, notably near Cape 
Adare. Interesting magnetite basalts are met with at 
Cape Barne and Tent Island in the west of Ross Island. 
Jensen is of the opinion that the heavier lavas, such as 
the basalts, flowed from fissures in the sides of the 
main crater, tapping lower portions of the magma. 
The upper portions gave rise to the lighter Kenytes, 
which are the most typical eruptive rocks of East Ant- 
arctica. (See Figure 8.) 

Mount Erebus and Its Kenytes—No description of 
the geology of the Ross Sea area would be complete 
without some reference to the dominating volcano of 
Erebus. This towers over thirteen thousand feet above 
the Ross Sea and together with its extinct neighbor, 
Mount Terror, practically forms Ross Island. The 
main bulk of the cone is built of the remarkable lava 
called Kenyte, which is closely allied to the rhomb 
porphyries of Norway, and also to Gregory’s series 
from Mount Kenya in East Africa. The chief char- 
acteristic of the Kenytes is the presence of large crystals 
of anorthoclase felspar, usually about one inch long. 
On almost all the outcrops these felspars weather out 
of the fine-grained ground mass under the action of 
frost so that the surface of the Kenyte resembles a 
medieval church door studded with huge nailheads. 
The chief constituents as given by Prior are silica 56 
per cent, alumina 21 per cent, soda 7 per cent, and 
‘potash 4 per cent. Data as to the period of the initia- 
tion of these eruptions are wanting. They are con- 

103 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


nected with the great tectonic movements of middle and 
late Tertiary times in this portion of the globe, but no 
fossils have been discovered of Tertiary age in the 
Ross Sea area which might furnish an answer to this 
question. (See Figure 11.) 

Detailed Geology in West Antarcticaa—We owe to 
_ Sir Edgeworth David a comprehensive discussion of 
the geological data from this sector of Antarctica, and 
the writer has made much use of it in the following 
brief account. There is clear evidence of a close con- 
nection between the rocks of Graham Land and those 
of South America. The basement rocks contain in- 
trusive gabbros and granodiorites which exhibit the 
most characteristic Andean affinities. Hence they be- 
long to the Pacific types of eruptive rock. In South 
Georgia, which appears to arise from the submarine 
ridge already described, the rocks are formed chiefly 
of old schists in which no determinable fossils have 
been found. In the South Orkneys on the same ridge, 
Dr. Bruce’s expedition discovered Ordovician grapto- 
lites and phyllocarids. Just to the southeast of these 
islands a specimen of Cambrian limestone containing 
Archeo-cyathine has been dredged, which shows that 
Cambrian rocks must occur in the vicinity (see Figure 
7). : 

Overlying these old rocks in Graham Land are strata 
of Mesozoic age which are folded mostly from west 
to east. At Hope Bay (63° 15’ S.) beds containing a 
rich Jurassic flora rest on coarse conglomerates which 
in turn repose on current-bedded sandstone with ob- 
scure plant remains. Among the plants are Clado- 

104 


Vike CON FINENT 


phebts, Pterophyllum, Sagenopteris, Thinnfeldia, etc., 
all of which also lived in Australia in Jurassic or 
Triassic times. This would seem to indicate a land 
connection between the two continents in Mesozoic 
times. The plants were found in a hard slaty rock, 
and show a lacustrine rather than a marine environ- 
ment (see Figure I1). 

At Snow Hill Island, one hundred miles to the south, 
Dr. Nordenskjold collected abundant Cretaceous fos- 
sils. These imply the existence of a mild climate with 
comparatively warm ocean currents at this period. 
Corals are abundant, such as Cycloseris, Parasmilia and 
Oculina. Cephalopods like Phylloceras, Lytoceras and 
Desmoceras have been described by Kilian from this 
locality. From Seymour Island close to Snow Hill 
comes a suite of Tertiary fossils of which the leaves of 
Araucaria and Fagus are specially interesting. These 
show that the relatively warm conditions persisted into 
Oligocene or Miocene times. In marine strata of about 
the same age numerous bird bones were discovered, 
which have been referred to five new genera of 
penguins. They seem to be akin to the penguin bones 
et Eocene“ Age from, -Oamarn (N.‘Z.): Finally. at 
Cockburn Island, near Snow Hill, Anderson found a 
conglomerate 160 meters above sea level containing 
numerous Pecten shells. This is probably of the Plio- 
cene Age. 

Adelie Land and adjacent areas. The region ex- 
plored by Mawson’s parties seems to exhibit much 
the same geological formations as were found near 
MacMurdo Sound. At Horn Bluff (150° E.) cliffs 

105 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


a  ((§|§.800 GO OO OOOO eee 


"SQUO}SOUI] DUI]][C}SAII ‘S}SIYs ‘sstour) 
‘Ojo ‘So}IUvIS JosUunNOZ 


9UO}SOUN] VuLYy}yeAIOIIIV 


(o1epy odey) oyxoeMARID) 9}e]S 


SOSSIOUr) 


sopueiy 


(213.1095 *S) sistyg 


9UO}SOWT] VUIYJEADOIYIIV 


ULLIqUIe)-I1g JAMO'T 


ueliquie)-o1g todd, 
*  ueriquie) 


* Q0z0IJV@q JIMO'T 


(SAIUYIO *S) sapyoydesy : ULIDSIAOPIO) 

saye[d ysy YM spoq uodvag I9MO'T WEG 
[B09 YIM spoq Uoovag J9dd~) [BOD YIM spoq UOIvIG uenusog 8 
: OTN = 

Aeg odopy 3e spaq jur[g * omssein[ 

Sd}aJOp zjzeNCj So}1a]Op saan , ee MOUG }e sojTuOWUTy snoade}o17 

spoq umsuoq oa 9u9907] 

‘Oyo ‘soprpouoyd ‘sazAyovs Ty, Sspoq u9}99q4 Asetjysay taddy 


SPAR] dJAUDY ‘SoUureIOY 


VaIW VAS ssoy 


‘Oyo ‘ANV’T dIlTady 


‘Oyo ‘SOUTeIOYY 


VOILOUVINY LSA 


. . . . . 


U999yJ 


THE CONTINENT 


one thousand feet high are composed of red ( Beacon?) 
sandstone containing coal and carbonaceous shales. 
They are capped by an immense thickness of dolerite 
sills. Here also gneisses and granites are common and 
constitute the basal beds. The Gaussberg to the far 
west is an extinct volcano built of leucite basalt. Even 
off Enderby Land (49° E.) dredgings by the “Val- 
divia’’ revealed much of the same series of rocks. 

We may conclude this chapter on Antarctic geology 
by a table indicating the dominant geological forma- 
tions so far discovered. 


CHAPTER VI 
SCENERY AND TOPOGRAPHY 


SCENERY 


EFORE discussing in some detail the characteris- 
B tics of the topography in Antarctica—and it was 
to study these that I took part in the 1910-13 Expedi- 
tion—it may be of interest to describe various aspects 
of the landscape and seascape which impressed them- 
selves vividly on my memory. I should like first to 
mention the storms which are so characteristic a fea- 
ture of the ‘Furious Fifties’ * and the “Shrieking Six- 
ties.’ Three days after leaving New Zealand, the 
“Terra Nova” was nearly sunk by a violent gale. After 
being some twenty-four hours exposed to its fury all 
the pumps refused duty, and the hold and engine room 
were rapidly filling. Only a Gustavus Doré could do 
justice to the scene which ensued. We bailed out that 
boat of five hundred tons with buckets by hand labor 
in a fashion which has rarely been duplicated. Three 
successive iron ladders led from the floor of the engine 
room up to the poop deck, and this was occupied for 
twenty hours by a bucket gang chiefly consisting of 
scientists. Outside was the sound of the booming gale 


1The “Roaring Forties,” “Furious Fifties,’ and “Shrieking 
Sixties,” refer to the winds in the latitudes concerned. 


108 


SCENERY AND TOPOGRAPHY 


shrilling through the shrouds and ratlines in one con- 
tinuous shriek. While the upper end of the “chain” 
of buckets was in an Antarctic atmosphere, down be- 
low the steaming waters which had risen over the 
furnace bars filled the engine room with heat. Hence 
the workers at the lower end of the chain were naked 
as the imps in the nether regions. The toll of the gale 
was heavy, as we lost several of the ponies and dogs 
and much of the port bulwarks was carried away by 
the waves. 

A week later we were beset by the pack ice and re- 
mained without making much progress therein for 
three weeks. Let us climb onto the crosstrees at mid- 
night and survey the unusual environment presented 
to us. All around lies the pack no longer like pan- 
cakes, but much thicker and (keeping to homely 
similes) now resembling shortcake. The ice is crossed 
by the meandering lines of the open “leads’’; to the 
north the heavens are banded with arcs of salmon cloud, 
while the sea in our rear is a vivid brownish-pink with 
an oily sheen reminding one of moist putty. Across 
it runs a long dark line extending indefinitely to the 
north. This is the shadow of the ship due to the 
midnight sun. He “sets’’ due south and “rises” in the 
same spot, for we are just on the Antarctic Circle. 
Far ahead of us two geysers shoot into the tranquil 
air and seem to touch the golden edge of a low bank 
of purple cloud. They come from two whales which 
are piloting us on our voyage to the south. 

Early in January we caught our first glimpse of the 

109 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


great Ross Ice Barrier” near Cape Crozier. In the 
far east where the “ribbon” of the ice wall reached the 
horizon, there was a marked difference in the sky to 
north and south respectively. To the north it was 
dark gray with heavy cumulus, but southward in a 
definite arc over the great Ross Ice Shelf this was 
changed to a pearly gray and the clouds were almost 
white. I saw nothing so striking as this “Ice-Blink” 
on any other occasion on our journeys. Just below 
the great wall of ice, here sixty feet high, were bands 
of brash ice. On this bobbing and rotating surface 
sported flocks of penguins, performing marvelous feats 
of equilibrium and nowise disturbed by the huge bulk 
of the ship towering over them. The Barrier front 
was deeply undercut by the waves at the water level 
and small berglets were constantly dropping off above 
this line of weakness. 

At the end of January we were gaining our first 
experience of sledging up one of the giant glaciers 
which carry the ice from the Plateau down to the Ross 
Sea. Let us compare this glacier valley with a valley 
in more familiar lands. There is no vestige of green 
anywhere, no sign of life present or past. Owing to 
the absence of men, trees, or houses it is impossible 
to estimate distances, for there are no familiar stand- 
ards. Time and again explorers have decided that a 
point for which they are making is only a mile or so 
away, to find that they have underestimated the distance 


2 This structure is a barrier to a ship, but morphologically is an 
ice shelf. The latter term is preferable and should replace the 
older term. 


IIo 


SCENERY AND TOPOGRAPHY 


two or three times. So here in the Ferrar Glacier 
Valley it was difficult at first to realize that it was 
four miles wide, and that the cliffs at the side were 
four or five thousand feet above the glacier. Very 
characteristic were the smooth walls of the valley, free 
from any of the ridges or spurs which partly block the 
view ina river-cut valley (see Figure 15). It was as if 
a gigantic carpenter had planed off every projection 
on the great walls. And indeed the Ice King with his 
glacier had done precisely that bit of crustal shaping! 

Yet it must not be thought that the scene lacked. 
variety or even color effects. ‘The cliffs were built up 
of alternating layers of reddish granite, black dolerite 
and yellow Beacon Sandstone. Below these appeared 
the broad belt of dark brown talus, contrasting with 
the flashing white surface of the great glacier. As for 
the latter, every few yards often exhibited fresh ice 
structures. Here were deep irregular bowls with their 
floors covered with fan crystals of ice. Alongside were 
topsy-turvy icicles joined at the lower ends only. Far- 
ther on, the solid ice was marked by glassy arabesques, 
probably where stones had sunk into the glacier. Again 
there were dome-shaped roofs covering pools of water, 
through which one fell at frequent intervals. Bound- 
ing the glacier was a colonnade of ice pinnacles some 
thirty feet high. The sun glistening on the ice minarets 
made a most impressive sight. 

A week or two later we explored a most unexpected 
region in the Antarctic. Below the Taylor Glacier 
lies a huge valley, some twenty-five miles long and 
several miles wide, in which there is hardly a vestige 

III 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


of snow or ice, except a few small glaciers on the 
steep slopes at the side and a few frozen drainage lakes 
on the floor (see Figure 13). Carrying our food and 
gear on our backs, we marched mile after mile down 
this great valley which had never before been traversed 


Fic. 13—PLAN AND SECTION OF TAYLOR VALLEY SHOW- 

ING TWO RIEGEL. 

(Scale of miles.) 
by man. The floor was covered with tumbled debris 
of all shapes and sizes of ground moraine, with here 
and there patches of gravel and examples of soil-flow. 
No better opportunity for studying the way in which 
a great glacier has eroded the earth’s crust can be 
imagined, and many pages of notes and sketches re- 
sulted from our journey down the Taylor Valley, which 
will be referred to later in the chapter (see Figure 15). 
One last glimpse will serve to show how the Ant- 
arctic in 78° S. appeared in the middle of winter. On 
the twenty-second of June, when the sun was farthest 

II2 


SCENERY AND TOPOGRAPHY 


north and had not been seen for eight weeks, I took a 
walk in the vicinity of Cape Evans. There was a hint 
of twilight to the north, appearing as a gray-blue sky 
extending across the outlet of MacMurdo Sound. This 
gave some little light which was reflected by the uni- 
versal covering of snow. It was impossible to make 
out ridge or hollow on the snow surface, in the dim 
light; but a distant black object like Tent Island was 
faintly visible, while a snow cliff just ahead could not 
be detected. There happened to be no wind, though 
the temperature was —25° F., and so I was able to 
walk for a time without a helmet. The most pictur- 
esque time in Antarctica, however, is when the sun 
is just setting and rolls along the horizon like a great 
golden football. Thus late in March I noted that the 
landscape, in place of a monotonous white, now glowed 
a rosy-pink where the sun glanced on the snow fields. 
The open water appeared salmon or buff in color, while 
the newly frozen ice was iridescent like tar. The 
shadow of Brown Island to the south was lemon-green, 
changing to purple in the distance over Mount Dis- 
covery. For a few minutes our own shadows were the 
most vivid bright blue! 


TOPOGRAPHY 


In this section I propose to describe principally those 
features of the topography which give it its special 
facies and differentiate it from a region undergoing 
normal erosion by rain or rivers. I shall follow some- 
what the order in which an investigator would meet 
with the examples, i.e., the coastal features come first, 


113 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


the inland valleys and cliffs next, and the nunataks, 
etc., last. I shall deal mainly with the Ross Sea area. 

Islands—The geographer is always interested in 
small islands, for from them he may often learn much 
as to the relative movements of land and sea. Un- 
fortunately in the Antarctic no very definite evidence 
of elevated beaches, notches, caves, etc., was apparent. 
This was partly no doubt due to the fact that the more 
or less permanent sea-ice prevents the formation of 
many beaches and allied features. The steep-to cliffs 
of some of the islands in the southwest of the Ross 
Sea indicate fairly late subsidence, and this, if gen- 
erally true of the locality, naturally hides most of the 
evidence of marine erosion. 

Shore lines —No doubt the usual shore line of the 
Antarctic consists of the inhospitable ice-front of the 
great Plateau ice cap. This permits no study of the 
underlying topography. The writer was fortunate, 
therefore, to be stationed in MacMurdo Sound (see 
Figure 8). Here on a coast line of about two hun- 
dred miles, from Cape Bird to Gregory Island, the 
following varying shore lines occur: 


Approx. 
Ice miles 
(a) Vertical ice walls over 50 feet high, usually 
moving ice 14 
(b) Vertical ice walls 5- ot Fike atten? stapes 
Mant Wee. : : : . 75 
(c) Low glacier snouts, ard ice ; Saas 
(d) Ancient sea-ice : . : a 
TOTAES is : : : : , «| SBF 


II4 


SCENERY, AND TOPOGRAPHY 


Rock 
(e) Steep rocky cliffs or headlands over 500 
feet, 7, : ; steak tai 
(f) Capes and crags 50-500 feet . ee: 
(g) Low-angle morainic shores , eee: 
Cie}, Beaches” : : ; : 3 
TOTAL ave ; 73 


The writer only examined three small beaches in all 
this stretch of coast. At Botany Bay, in Granite Har- 
bor, a beach occurred about half a mile long composed 
of granite bowlders. These were undoubtedly water- 
worn, and nearby such bowlders extended fifty feet 
above sea level. Perhaps here we have evidence of 
uplift. David and Priestley describe raised marine de- 
posits near Mount Larsen which may have been thrust 
up by movement of large glacial masses. On the whole, 
however, the shore lines seem to indicate subsidence, 
as witness the drowned cirque at the head of Granite 
Harbor. (See Figure 24.) 

Capes.—The importance of lists of capes as given 
in the old-style geography is to be discounted, but it is 
apparent that the capes in Antarctica are perhaps the 
most important portions of the continent. Some are 
historic, such as Cape Adare, Cape Armitage, Cape 
Royds and Cape Evans. The occurrence of capes is 
due, of course, to the presence of more resistant mate- 
rial, while the less resistant has been hollowed out and 
in general is still overwhelmed by the covering of ice. 
Yet there has been very little marine erosion, so that 
the coasts of Antarctica are characteristically linear or 

its 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


broadly curved. Possibly the original fault planes are 
better preserved in Antarctica than they would be along 
a coast subjected to river and marine erosion. Most 
of the capes around MacMurdo Sound stand out as 
rounded headlands, generally fifty or one hundred feet 
above the sea. In the vicinity of that curious “desert” 
locality, the lower Taylor Valley, the headlands are 
free from snow or ice for a distance of several miles 
from the sea, but as we proceeded north this bare area 
became more and more restricted by the increase in the 
width of the ice sheet behind. 

On the east side of MacMurdo Sound, Cape Royds 
had a rocky hinterland which extended a mile from 
the sea and three miles along the coast. In the lakes 
in this hinterland the geologists of the 1907 expedi- 
tion made many surprising discoveries of frozen but 
living fresh water fauna and flora (see Figure 8). 
Cape Evans was triangular in plan, each side being 
about half a mile. It exhibited very interesting fea- 
tures in the shape of débris cones from five to thirty 
feet high, which were proved to be the erosion relics 
of giant erratics. Cape Armitage promontory is about 
nine miles long and one and a half miles wide, but only 
about three miles of the southern end is partly free 
from ice. Here were fine examples of solifluction, usu- 
ally in the form of pentagonal patches of gravel marked 
out by narrow grooves, the patches being some twenty 
feet across. Curious gullies ran around the slopes 
near Hut Point, along the contours. They were prob- 
ably due to peripheral streams flowing around the edge 
of the Ross Ice Shelf, when it occupied successive posi- 


116 


SCENERY AND TOPOGRAPHY 


tions from three hundred feet down to one hundred 
and twenty feet above sea level. (See Figure 8.) 

The cliffs around Granite Harbor and on the Kukri 
Hills were given special attention, to see how they had 
been affected by the glacial covering which had just 
receded from them. They were generally formed of 
granite and were characterized by a pronounced shoul- 
der between the upland surface and the cliff proper. 
Everywhere were couloirs or gullies either snow- 
filled or empty. Usually these widened at the top, and 
their sides were covered with fragments of the ad- 
jacent rock. On sunny days they often contained a 
considerable amount of thaw water which carried down 
a slushy mixture of stones, gravel and snow. In my 
opinion we have here the initial conditions which often 
lead to the development of a cirque, if the general 
temperature conditions remain satisfactory for a long 
enough period. This problem, however, will be dis- 
cussed at more length a little later. 

Only in one or two localities have caves been dis- 
covered. The writer’s party found one in Granite 
Harbor which was about fifty feet high and thirty feet 
deep. Priestley describes another from Robertson Bay. 
They are obviously very rare on the east Antarctic 
coasts. 

Lakes and Tarns.—To the student of erosion, lakes 
indicate an interruption in the normal cycle, and in a 
glaciated region they are of special interest for even 
if frozen they show that relatively large masses of 
fresh water are possible in the region. We observed 
many types of lakes or tarns. In the ground moraine 


117 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


there were lake-filled hollows which seemed in general 
to be due to the melting of extremely ancient masses 
of ice, once covered by the moraine. These were com- 
mon on the west side of the Koettlitz Glacier, where 
Alph Lake was nearly a mile long, and is in part still 
walled in by ancient ice. Others were due to moraines 
which blocked the outlet of the valley, as, for instance, 
below the Garwood Glacier, where the lake was two 
miles long. Lake Bonney below the Taylor Glacier 


Fic. 14.—D£EBRIS-CONES BETWEEN EREBUS GLACIER AND 
THE SEA-ICE, NEAR CAPE EVANS. 


Successive stages shown by a, b, c, d, e. The cones are from 
5 to 15 feet high. 


is also two miles long. It seemed many feet deep and 
full of alge, but we had not time to cut through the 
ice surface and investigate it more fully. There ap- 
pears to be a rock sill between Lake Bonney and the 
sea, for the defile at its eastern end is over one hundred 
feet above the sea (see Figure 13). 

David and Priestley describe at length many of the 
small lakes near Cape Royds (see Figure 8). These 
were investigated during the winter by means of 
trenches. Most of them lay in the hollows in a long 

118 


SCENERY AND TOPOGRAPHY 


shallow glacier-cut depression extending along the hin- 
terland from Cape Barne to Cape Royds and beyond. 
Blue Lake was about six hundred yards long, the others 
being much smaller. Green Lake was about one hundred 
yards across and about five feet deep. Below the ice 
was found a reservoir of liquid brine with the low 
termperature of 25~. Ff. The temperature of the ice 
at the bottom was —2° F., while it was —23° F. 
near the surface. Clear Lake was a little larger, and 
the ice was eight feet thick. At this lower level the 
ice was +29° F. while the air outside was about 
—10° F. There was four feet of water at the bottom 
with a temperature of +35° F. Blue Lake was fif- 
teen feet deep, and at the bottom growing algze were 
found which contained living rotifers (see p. 218). 
This indicates that the suspension of animation in these 
organisms must extend over many seasons, for it can 
be only very rarely that Blue Lake melts to the bot- 
tom. Farther south, near Cape Barne, is Sunk Lake, 
whose ice surface was twenty feet below sea level and 
whose floor was some fifty feet below the sea, which 
was only one hundred and fifty feet distant. Ice-Dam 
Lakes on Cape Evans, resembling in miniature the 
Glenroy Lakes of Scotland, are described in the writ- 
er’s large monograph. 

Débris Cones.—A few days after our arrival at Cape 
Evans the geologists were advised to inspect what our 
informants described as “‘little volcanic craters,’ which 
were seriously stated to be parasitic cones on the low- 
est slopes of Mount Erebus. These cones were scat- 
tered all over the rock platform between the low 


IIQ 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


promontory of Cape Evans and the icy mantle which 
covered most of Erebus. They consisted of conical 
piles of kenyte fragments from five feet up to twenty 
feet high. It was not for some months that we had 
the opportunity to investigate distant examples, and 
then their origin was quite clear. About one mile south 
of Cape Evans, near Lands End, we found all stages 
of these cones. There was Seal Rock (see a, Figure 
14), a solid mass of kenyte about ten feet high, but 
in all probability an erratic block. Higher up the 
slopes was Thumb Cone (0) with a mantle of débris 
just beginning to form at the base. Nearby was an- 
other cone about twelve feet high (c), with only a 
small portion of the original erratic left at the top. 
In the vicinity also were small cones where none of 
the original erratic was visible (d and e). I cut into 
a débris cone behind Cape Evans and found a solid 
core of homogeneous kenyte within. Here “‘thaw-and- 
freeze’ erosion (nivation) had obviously been pre- 
vented from acting upon the central portion of the 
base of the erratic. At Mount Suess we found a com- 
posite cone which was twenty-five feet high (and about 
fifty by thirty yards in plan). It was surmounted by 
a block of sandstone lying on edge and about two feet 
high. But the southwestern end of the same cone was 
formed of fragments of basalt which were partly covy- 
ered by sandstone fragments. Evidently here two 
monoliths of different rock lying side by side had 
weathered simultaneously. 

Moraines.—All types of these structures occur in 
Antarctica but they differ in quantity largely from 

120 


SCR NERY AND TOPOGRAPHY 


those of temperate regions. Thus visitors to the Alps 
in New Zealand see the lower mile or two of the glaciers 
completely covered by surface moraine, so that the ice 
is invisible. Débris is falling on to the moving glacier 
and gradually building up lateral and medial moraines. 
“Glacier milk’? pours out of the ends of the glacier 
owing to the grinding of the floor by the mobile glacial 
“plane.” But none of these phenomena is to be seen 
in Antarctica. The glaciers are practically free from 
débris. Their glacial streams, as far as I saw them 
in two summers, were practically clear. Nowhere in 
two hundred miles of Antarctic coast line did I find a 
well-defined terminal moraine, though there were half 
a dozen possible sites. But the ends of the glaciers 
were all of clear ice, except for a few silt bands and 
occasional fragments of larger rock. This condition is 
not so marked, I believe, in glaciers nearer the Ant- 
arctic Circle, but in 77° and 78° S. the climate is much 
too cold for the maximum effects of glacial erosion to 
be developing to-day. 

Behind Cape Evans I was unable to find any very 
clear indication of a terminal moraine. Only in two 
small areas was there any definite arrangement of heaps 
a few yards long and a few feet high, which could be 
differentiated from the general tumbled heaps of débris, 
no doubt partly ground moraine, which littered Cape 
Evans. At the head of Granite Harbor was a small 
moraine across Cuff Cape. It was about five hundred 
yards long and about fifty feet thick perhaps. The 
most favorable site for a huge moraine would be at 
the snout of the Taylor Glacier—which lies some 

I2I 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


twenty miles from the sea (see Figure 13). But 
its terminal moraine is an irregular heap of débris some 
twenty-five feet high and about one hundred yards in 
length. So also at the end of Hobbs Glacier (see 
Figure 8), where the face-of the ice is sixty feet 
high, there occur only two curious terminal “piers” of 
_ silt about thirty feet high and one hundred feet long. 
These had the appearance of “‘eskers,’’ but may be 
the relics of a former continuous terminal moraine, 
though I think it unlikely. 

The small glaciers occupying the numerous cirque 
valleys to the south of the Ferrar Glacier were also 
practically free from surface moraine, nor were there 
any terminal moraines anywhere near their present 
snouts. At the mouths of the cirque valleys, where 
they joined the main Koettlitz Valley, there were in- 
definite heaps of morainic material across these cirque 
valleys. JI was never quite able to decide if these 
moraines were terminals due to the former earlier 
cirque glaciers or were merely portions of the ancient 
lateral moraine of the mighty Koettlitz Glacier, ete. 
The occurrences of morainic material won the present 
elaciers (which occasionally were met with in our 
traverse) will be described in the chapter dealing with 
glaciology. (See Figure 17.) 

Sections across the Taylor Valley.—This region 
probably represents better than anywhere else so far 
investigated in Antarctica the subglacial topography 
of the continent. It is shown in a somewhat diagram- 
matic fashion in Figure 15. Starting from New Har- 
bor at the mouth of the valley, the latter presents the 

I22 


SCENERY AND TOPOGRAPHY 


typical catenary cross-section of a glacier-cut valley. 
A splendid pair of walls with the characteristic slope 
of about 33° defines the glacier trough. There is no 
terminal moraine near the sea, which seems to denote 


Snout of Taylor Glacier 
ee ee itch Heat tooo 
FA fe oF 
22 <2 ZAR ‘ 


Qs 


Solitary Racks 
Matterhorn 5000 


EP Sto are the Apposed Valleys 9 
the bore Taylor Glaciers (Looks 75. Wet)” is 


Fic. 15.—BLock DIAGRAM SHOWING THE ICE-FREE TAYLOR 
VALLEY, 18 MILES LONG, AND THE ICE DIVIDE BETWEEN 
THE TAYLOR AND FERRAR GLACIERS. 


(By permission of John Murray.) 


a fairly uniform and perhaps rapid retrocession of the 
glacier. About six miles from the coast a narrow 
defile appears on the north side, but a rounded valley 
floor rises gradually to two thousand feet over the 
greater part of the trough. West of this point there 
is a sudden drop from this great rock barrier (which 
I called the Nussbaum Riegel *) into the next bowl of 


3 Riegel is used in the Swiss Alps to indicate such a rock bar. 
123 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


the valley. This is filled with morainic material to the 
depth of a hundred feet or so, for the drainage of the 
bowl is away from the sea to the salty waters of Lake 
Bonney. The defile previously mentioned is about 
1,500 feet deep, and would seem to be a water- 
cut gorge denoting an interglacial period. Lake Bon- 
ney is separated into two portions by a granite bar 
five hundred feet high. This also is traversed by a nar- 
row gorge on the northern side of the trough, and is a 
smaller edition of the Nussbaum barrier or riegel. 
Then about half a mile west we reach the snout of the 
Taylor Glacier, which appears to be over-riding mo- 
raine material at its extremity. (See Figure 13.) 

Visitors to Switzerland will recognize how closely 
the alternation of gorge, riegel, and bowl recalls the 
classic glacial valley between Airolo and Biasca. It is 
the writer’s opinion that similar forces of erosion have 
produced these similar but far distant topographies. 
The evolution of this peculiarly complicated structure 
in the floor of the large glacier-cut troughs of the Fer- 
rar-Taylor Glaciers is to be explained in my opinion 
by a study of cirque-erosion. 

Cirques-—These land-forms are very abundant 
throughout the glacial topographies of the world, and 
it is rather surprising that their origin was not at all 
understood until the research of certain American 
geologists in the western United States about Igoo. 
The cirque is a peculiar valley which has been com- 
pared in shape to an armchair. It has a more or less 
circular base and steep bounding walls on three sides, 
being open on the lower fourth side. The scarp of 

124 


SCENERY AND TOPOGRAPHY 


Mount Lister (thirteen thousand feet) shows some of 
the finest cirques in the world. The summit itself, as 
viewed from the east, appears to have small cirques on 
two sides while another at nearly the same level ap- 
pears on the sky line to the right. Then there is a row 


§1S* STAGE 


Overflow from 


Solita ry Rocks 
! 


\ Cwm Ice Nussbaum 
Riegel 


Sea Level 


Nussbaum Riegel 
aci ‘ 


Sea Level 
Fic. 16.—SECEIONS ILLUSTRATING THE EVOLUTION OF THE 


RIEGEL IN TAYLOR VALLEY. 


Stage 1 shows hypothetical cirque (or cwm) valleys, later over- 
whelmed as in stage 2. (Geog. Journal, 1914.) 


of four cirques immediately below this series. Finally 

five or six cirques are packed together in the lowest 

rank immediately above the foothills at the head of the 

Blue Glacier. Cirques are of all sizes from the small 

drowned cirque in Granite Harbor to the giant Wal- 

cott Cirque just south of Mount Lister, which is eight 
125 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


miles across and has a rear wall some eight thousand 
feet high. The absence of any collecting ground at 
the head of many of these cirques certainly indicates 
that they are not due to normal glacier erosion. My 
Antarctic experience led me to believe that nivation 
(1.e. thaw-and-freeze chipping) as described by Hobbs 
in his book, Existing Glaciers (1911), is the major 
process involved. I give a full discussion, based on 
local examples, in my book, Physiography of Mac- 
Murdo Sound (1922). 

Charles Darwin advised young naturalists to seek 
for evidence of evolution in a given group of organisms 
among the specimens themselves. If enough samples 
are present there are, said he, likely to be many differ- 
ent stages represented. Applying the same principle in 
Antarctica, I believe that I can see varying stages in the 
evolution of the topography of the Taylor Valley indi- 
cated in adjacent land-forms (see Figure 8). Thus 
all along the Royal Society Range to the south is a suite 
of eleven cirque valleys extending over some thirty 
miles in length, which constitutes a “Fretted Upland,” 
as Hobbs terms it. These usually contain small stag- 
nant glaciers, which the first observers called “Ice 
Slabs.”’ Such glaciers are situated at the heads of the 
valleys concerned. Above these lower cirques are sev- 
eral series of smaller cirques in the scarp of Lister 
itself, in shape looking as if a giant had pressed his 
thumb repeatedly into a slope made of putty. The 
writer believes that this type of cirque topography is 
the first which developed on the onset of the Ice Age. 

126 


SCENERY AND TOPOGRAPHY 


The subsequent phenomena are described in terms of 
the Palimpsest theory. 

Palimpsest Theory.—lf{ now we turn to the great 
outlet valleys, such as those occupied by the Taylor or 
Ferrar glaciers, we find evidence of a similar cirque- 
cut topography drowned by the overflow of plateau-ice 
from the hinterland. This is made clear in the dia- 
grams annexed. In the upper figure (see Figure 17) 
we see several cirque (or cwm) glaciers burrowing into 
the sloping land surface. One lies below Solitary 
Rocks and one below Nussbaum Riegel (see Figure 
16). Later the Taylor Glacier overflows from the 
Plateau and pours down over the cirques, cutting away 
part of the Solitary Rocks and Nussbaum Riegel. 
These barriers on recession are still visible. The con- 
strictions in the valley and occasional steeper falls in 
the Ferrar Glacier are probably due to the same cause. 
Thus on recession we see somewhat faintly preserved 
the relics of the cirque-erosion cycle in the shape of 
bars across the floor of the valley, which on the whole 
is due to normal glacier planation. This combination 
of topographies is expressed in the term palimpsest, 
which means that older writing can be observed on a 
parchment below the present scrip. The pre-glacial 
stage, the stage of cirque-erosion, and the ice-flood 
stage are all indicated in Figure 17. 

Nunatak and Nunakol.—These are rock “islands” 
surrounded by a sea of glacier ice. The term nunatak 
means “like a land’ and it expresses an irregular 
rocky residual, too hard to be eroded completely, and 
still towering above the glacier. But in Antarctica and 

127 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


elsewhere there is another type of rock-residual which 
has been very markedly smoothed off by overriding ice 


Be 
ig. om, Se 


<a ~ sll lt tny Ly 


ca i= Fae 
NU S aS) SO&, sess Le —— ay aS 
eM — = Fes =i aS 


—_ aia 


Fic. 17—BLocK DIAGRAMS ILLUSTRATING THE “PALIMP- 
SEST THEORY’ OF GLACIER EROSION APPLIED TO THE ROYAL 
SociETY RANGE. 


In the upper figure the pre-glacial topography is suggested; in 
the central figure the advancing hemicycle with much cirque-ero- 
sion by headward recession; in the lower figure the period of 
ice-flood when the outlet glaciers were at their maximum. (K. F. T. 
indicate Koettlitz, Ferrar and Taylor glaciers.) 


which has since retreated. My Norwegian colleague, 

Gran, suggested the Icelandic term nunakol (lonely 

rounded ridge) as suitable for this land-form, which 
128 


SCENERY, AND TOPOGRAPHY 


has had a very different history from the nunatak. 
Examples of both types are to be seen in the block 
diagram of the Mackay Glacier (see Figure 24). 
Thus Mount Suess is a nunatak. I doubt if the main 
glacier ever surmounted it, though it is quite likely that 
cirque-cutting gave rise to the sharp ridges and peaks 
of its summit. To the north is Gondola Ridge, a 
typical nunakol which was littered with moraine and 
has only recently been freed from its ice covering. 
Just to the southeast is Redcliff Nunakol of a similar 
nature. 

Water Erosion.—We may conclude this chapter by 
a brief reference to the agents which have cut out 
the Antarctic topography. Wind has not much power 
in a land covered with ice and snow, though I give 
a number of examples of wind transport and erosion 
in my memoir. But I was especially struck with two 
facts in my study of the Ross Sea area. Firstly, most 
of the ice is stagnant nearly all the year round and 
cannot therefore be eroding much. Secondly, although 
the average air temperature was only 25° F. in the 
warmest months, yet there was a great deal of running 
water at far colder air temperatures. Thus on Sep- 
tember 17th, 1911, I noticed snow melting on black 
rock when the air temperature was 25° degrees below 
freezing. So that numberless examples of water 
erosion were visible, such as gullies, meanders, terraces 
and small deltas at mouths of streams. One of these 
streams was twenty-five miles long and flowed under 
the Koettlitz Glacier ice until the middle of March, 
when the air temperature was —8° F. (i.e. 40° below 

129 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


freezing). So that it seemed to me that the present 
ice-cut topography dated back largely to much warmer 
conditions, while the chief erosion at present (at 
78° S.) was possibly due to normal water erosion and 
nivation, of course confined almost wholly to the 
warmer parts of the year. 


CHAPTER: VIL 
ICE SHEETS AND GLACIERS 


THE ConpDITIONS OF MAXIMUM EROSION 


HAVE investigated glacial conditions in many 

countries both in the northern and southern hemi- 
spheres, and my studies have led me to certain perhaps 
novel conclusions with regard to the real meaning of 
the onset of an ice age. Any one who has done much 
flying knows that there is an environment in many ways 
suited for an ice age within a mile or two of any 
temperate city. It occurs, of course, vertically over- 
head. It is profitable, therefore, to look upon the 
approach of an ice age as essentially due to the lower- 
ing of certain isothermal zones or layers from an 
overhead position until such zones intersect more or 
less of the land surface concerned.* These zones have a 
slight slope from the equator to the Pole. If we travel 
from New York to the North Pole or from Sydney to 
the South Pole, we reach latitudes where this Ice Age 
layer comes down to sea level, at about 60° of latitude 
in both cases. This layer corresponds essentially to the 
permanent snow line. No part of the world perhaps is 
better suited for a study of the optimum temperature 


1 Fluctuations in the amount of snowfall are of secondary im- 
portance. 


131 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


for glacial erosion than the lands bordering the south- 
west corner of the Pacific Ocean. For in Australia we 
have Mount Kosciusko (7,328 feet) with its clear evi- 
dence that the erosive agents of the Ice Age had only 
operated for a short time when the favorable glacial 
environment vanished (see Figure 18). There is Tas- 
mania with its low mountains of three thousand to five 
thousand feet showing much more markedly the results 


I 


"as L 
i 
Fic. 18.—DIAGRAM SHOWING POSITIONS OF THE LAYER OF 


MAXIMUM NIVATION AT PRESENT, AND IN THE PLEISTO- 
CENE. PLEIOCENE CONDITIONS ARE MERELY SUGGESTED. 


of a less brief visit of the Ice Age. There is New Zea- 
land with small glaciers in the North Island, and large 
glaciers (very much greater than most others in tem- 
perate lands) around Mount Cook (12,345 feet) in the 
South Island. Finally, there are the record glaciers of 
Antarctica to be included in the comparison. 

I do not propose to dwell on these comparisons, but 
no glaciers show active glacial erosion to-day better 
than those of the Mount Cook region in the center of 

132 


iCE SHEETS AND ‘GLACIERS 


the South Island of New Zealand. Here the conditions 
of a plentiful snowfall are combined with a suitable 
position of the isothermal layer of 32° F. It is this 
last control, the environment where freeze-and-thaw 
action is naturally most active, which is all-important 
in eroding a landscape by the action of ice. Each time 
the temperature sinks below freezing point (32° F.) 
a wedge of ice is formed in every crevice of rock. This 
may crack off a fragment of rock, which falls away 
when thaw sets in. When this is repeated day and 
night during many months, the amount of erosion must 
be tremendous. The actual wearing away of a valley 
fioor by a glacier is, no doubt, more striking and on 
a larger scale. But it only affects a relatively small por- 
tion of the topography, whereas nivation (freeze and 
thaw) attacks the whole landscape. So also the river 
only cuts out its bed, but the rains and rills wear away 
fragments from an infinitely greater area. 

A good deal of rather ill-defined evidence in the Ant- 
arctic indicates that movement of the ice (and conse- 
quently glacial erosion) is much more active in the 
summer months than in the winter. Even Cape Adare 
(in latitude 71°) has only one month above freezing 
point, while at Cape Evans (latitude 78°) the hottest 
month has an average temperature of only 25° F. 
The writer has formed the opinion that temperatures 
fluctuating around 32° F. are the most favorable for 
pronounced glacial erosion, but we have no accurate 
measurements in Antarctica on this question of seasonal 
variation in erosion. However, in Greenland Ryder 


133 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


found that the Upernivik Glacier moved one hundred 
and twenty-five feet a day in August (40° F.) and only 
thirty-three feet a day in April (12° F.). The follow- 
ing table (partly based on Hess)’ gives the velocities 
of various glaciers. It is obvious, however, that the 
velocity depends largely on the size and slope of the 
glacier concerned—as well as on the temperature con- 
ditions. 


VELOCITY 
GLACIER Country |LATITUDE 

(usually yearly average) 
Karajak ye ts Greenland | 71° N. |59_ feet per day 
Wiatrl 27 wee sed Alaska 60° N. | 7. feet per day 
Mer de Glace ....| Switzerland| 46° N. | 1.6 feet per day 
Rhone Glacier ... 46° N. | 1 foot per day 
Hintereis Glacier. a 46° N. | 0.5 foot per day 
LASIEAG 2 0.1 oe os New Zealand! 44° S. | 1.5 feet per day 
Franz Joseph ...:| “ e 44° S. |16 feet per day 
Wraehay oa. 58s we Antarctica | 77° S. | 2.8 feet per day (summer) 
Barne Glacier iy 77° GS. 130. feet per year 
(Payot es oak ot 2 78° S. |Stagnant 
Berar cis: ex 78° S. |32 feet (Feb. to Oct.) 
Ross Barrier .... x 80° S. | 1.4 feet per day 
Beardmore ...... ~ 85° S. | 3. feet per day (?) 


In the preceding diagram (see Figure 18) I show 
five typical glaciated regions: Kosciusko is in Australia 
and Mount Field in Tasmania, Ruapehu and Cook are 
in New Zealand. Mount Lister is on the west side of 
MacMurdo Sound in Antarctica. The heavy black 
line shows the present position (in latitude and eleva- 
tion) of the temperature layer of 32° F. (the “Niva- 
tion Layer”). Hence cirque-cutting is occurring to-day 


2 Hess, Die Gletscher (Brunswick, 1904). 
134 


ICE SHEETS AND‘ GLACIERS 


quite actively on Mount Cook and Ruapehu which are 
intersected by this layer. The lower sloping line (on 
the right) shows where this nivation layer was situated 
in Pleistocene times. It had in fact descended about 
one thousand five hundred feet below its present posi- 
tion, and cirques were being actively cut on Kosciusko 
and Mount Field at that period. It will be noticed that 
neither of these “layers” intersects the Antarctic 
mountains. But we have a good deal of evidence 
that world temperatures were warmer in Pliocene times 
than they are to-day. Jt is possible, therefore, that 
the cirques of Antarctica were cut several million years 
ago, possibly during late Pliocene times.* At any rate 
the cirques high on the slopes of Mount Lister have 
a present-day temperature of —25° F. On no theory 
of glacier erosion can the cirques be due to the tem- 
perature or snowfall conditions obtaining there to-day. 


CLASSIFICATION OF GLACIERS 


There have been a number of different categories 
proposed for the differing types of glaciers. It is 
quite clear, as Hobbs has pointed out, that classes 
which depended on knowledge gained in the European 
Alps were quite unsatisfactory. The Mer de Glace 
is merely the dwindling relic of one limb of the mighty 
glacier which formerly filled the huge Chamonix Val- 
ley. Hobbs in his book, Existing Glaciers, produced 
a useful classification which took into account the 


3 See the writer’s paper on this aspect of glaciation in Proceed- 
ings of the Pan-Pacific Scientific Congress (Tokyo, 1926); with 
five block diagrams. 


135 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


method by which the glaciers were nourished, and also 
the relation of relic-glaciers to their original shape and 
size. Priestley and Wright in their large memoir 
(based on their research while on the Scott expedi- 
tion of 1910-13) have welded previous classifications 
into a comprehensive scheme, and this, with some 
- modifications, the present writer believes to be the best 
advanced so far. 

Priestley and Wright divide glaciers into three major 
classes : 


CLass A 
FORMATIONS OF THE AREA OF PREDOMINANT SUPPLY 
Types Synonyms 


Ice cap type (Hobbs) 


Continental Ice ...... or 
Greenland type 


Island Ice 

Highland Ice 

Sindh oe ove Nivation (Hobbs) 
poowernr lice... os... Glacieret (Taylor) 


Crass B 
FORMATIONS OF THE AREA OF PREDOMINANT MOVEMENT 
Types Synonyms 


(a) Wall-sided glaciers (a) Curtain glaciers (Taylor) 
(b) Valley glaciers (0,) Dendritic Hobbs 
Transection 
Outlet (Taylor) 
(b,) Alpine type (Heim) 
Cliff (Taylor) 
136 


ICE SHEETS: AND GLACIERS 


Crass C 
FORMATIONS OF THE AREA OF PREDOMINANT WASTAGE 
Types Synonyms 


Expanded Foot Ice 
Ice Tongues Afloat 
Piedmont Ice Alaskan type (Werth) 
Confluent Ice 
Avalanche Ice 
Ciass D 


Type Synonym 
Shelf Ice Barrier Ice 


These classes are illustrated in Figure Io. 


Continental ice in Antarctica is of gigantic size, 
probably covering four million square miles. No other 
similar example occurs, though the ice cap in Green- 
land is of the same general form. Smaller examples 
occur in Iceland, Norway and the Arctic Islands. 

Highland ice is defined as a comparatively thin ice 
sheet conforming to the undulations of the land be- 
neath. It is not common in East Antarctica, but an 
example occurs near Cape Adare. (See Figure 19.) 

Island ice is a sheet of ice covering an island, usually 
with a regular domed surface. They are common off 
Queen Mary Land. 

Cirque ice may be confined to the nivation hollow 
which has been sapped into the side of a scarp, or the 
snowfall may increase and hence the cirque glacier may 
spill down hill. Cirque-erosion is due primarily to 


137 


HIGHLAND JCE 


—_— CpN Gath Tat Ait, 4, 


CIRQUE ICE 
cD #Y_AND SPILLOVER 


VIEW OF = 


CURTAIN GLACIERS 
HANGING ON WALL 


CROSS SECTIONS. 
G- VALLEY GLACIER 
H- CURTAIN GLACIER 


BiG. 19.—SKETCHES ILLUSTRATING THE CLASSIFICATION 
OF GLACIERS. 


All are sections, except F, J, K and L. (Mainly based on 
Priestley and Wright.) 


ICHh SHEETS AND GLACIERS 


nivation and not to pressure or rasping by the glacier. 

Curtain Glaciers—Examples are present on the north 
side of the Taylor Valley near Solitary Rocks. The 
glaciers are usually stagnant, and often override de- 
bris, instead of excavating a valley (see Figure 19 
ae ey. 

Valley Glaciers Apparently Priestley and Wright 
include both large and small glaciers, which have 
carved out a valley, under this general head. The pres- 
ent writer prefers to subdivide them according to their 
size and slope, etc. Thus we have among valley 
glaciers : 


Outlet glaciers—large glaciers of significance in drain- 
ing the surplus of the Continental Ice to the sea. 
Transection glaciers—tributaries which have linked 
adjacent outlet glaciers, e.g., near Knob Head and 

south of Mount Suess. 

Dendritic glaciers—Hobbs’ terms for small tributary 
glaciers, more or less isolated from the main valley 
glacier, to which they originally were feeders. These 
may be graded if they have cut down their valleys 
to the level of the main valley, or discordant if they 
hang above the main valley. Many cliff and curtain 
glaciers are of this latter type. It is clear that some 
glaciers are intermediate in character and can be 
classified differently according to the stress laid on 
one or the other criterion. 


Expanded Foot Glacier.—The ice expands below the 
main outlet valley into a vacant valley below. This 


139 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


form is present in the empty main valley below the 
Taylor Glacier. Blue Glacier (see K, Figure 19) to 
some extent expands on entering the sea. 

Ice tongues need little description. They may be 
simple or end in several “tonguelets,’’ or may be asym- 
metrical as at the snout of the Ferrar Glacier (see K, 
Figure 19). 

Piedmont Ice-—Broad areas of ice at low level 
usually fed by one or two valley glaciers. Their 
crevasses are generally along the long axis of the ice 
sheet. Sometimes (as in Bowers Piedmont) they are 
relatively stagnant, without supply from glaciers. 

Confluent Ice-——lIce sheets due to the confluence of 
several ice tongues but held together by a land barrier 
(see L, Figure 19). They are not common. 

Shelf ice or ice shelf is a broad sheet of ice due 
to extensions of land ice, with or without interstitial 
sea-ice; or it may be due to the accumulation of snow 
upon old sea-ice. In Figure 19, at M, is shown an early 
stage of the composite type (with land- and sea-ice). 
At N is a later stage when snow has obliterated the 
difference in levels. At O is an example which has col- 
lected mainly upon banks or low islands. 


THE GREAT OUTLET GLACIERS 


In my sledge journeys during the summers of IQII 
and 1912 I investigated the characteristics of four 
outlet glaciers, each of which presented features of 
special interest. Thus the Mackay Glacier was un- 
usually broad, and flowed through an “archipelago” of 


nunataks and nunakols. It reached the sea by several 
140 


fee Shae ho AND GLACIERS 


snouts, one of which formed the Mackay Ice Tongue. 
The Ferrar Glacier was simpler in plan and occupied 
the finest valley. It offered a relatively unbroken slope 
to the Plateau and was joined in Siamese-twin fashion 
to the Taylor Glacier. The latter was stagnant and its 
empty lower valley has already been referred to. The 
Koettlitz Glacier was the largest of the four and of- 
fered an unrivaled study of the effects of thaw-waters 
and surface weathering on a broad surface of rela- 
tively stagnant glacier. A detailed description of a 
traverse of the Ferrar Glacier will give a good 
idea of their characters (see Figure 8). 
Their positions and dimensions are as follows: 


oh Approx. Approx 

Megie Position, | Length, | Width, |Height of i iets 

S) Pat Miles Miles | Plateau, |**“°T#8° 

ees Slope 

Moettlitz.....| “78. 30'— 45 5 to. 12 5000 I in 45 
77° 50° 

Pesrat <2. 7 AE 50 6 6000 PtoaeG 

Sy ROT 2's se 77° A 30* 5 to 12 6000 I in 30 


Mackay 2...) 37 30 6 to 10 4000 I in 40 
* Has retreated 20 miles from the sea. 


It will be noticed that the grades are by no means 
steep. Usually for long stretches the glacier is nearly 
level, and then a considerable rise is encountered where 
the glacier flows over some sub-glacial and nearly 
worn-down bar (riegel). Here are numerous cre- 
vasses, which also occur opposite the tributary glaciers, 
owing to the thrust of these latter upon the ice of the 
main glacier. Were it not for these icefalls and tribu- 


IAI 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


tary crevasses, the ascent of these outlet glaciers would 
be a comparatively easy task. | 


THE FERRAR OUTLET GLACIER 


We were landed by the “Terra Nova’ off Butter 
Point on the twenty-seventh of January, I911. We 
sledged westward over sea-ice for four and one-half 
miles until we reached the center of the snout of the 
Outlet Glacier. The latter was only three feet above 
the sea-ice at this point. The peculiar tongue of the 
Glacier along the Bowers Piedmont is shown in Figure 
ro at kK 

The valley of the lower Ferrar Glacier is about four 
miles wide and extends southwest for about thirty 
miles. The northern face is a marvelous wall-like cliff, 
two thousand to three thousand feet above the glacier, 
as stated previously, as straight and smooth as if planed 
by a giant carpenter. On the south side the wall is 
breached by tributary glaciers coming in from the 
Blue Glacier and the snow slopes of Mount Lister. 

The chief features of the lower portion of one of 
these huge glaciers can best be realized by a description 
of a traverse of the Ferrar Glacier across the snout. 

Center to South.—At its mouth the Ferrar Glacier 
is bounded by -bare cliffs with the normal angle of 
about 33°, which reach a height of three or four thou- 
sand feet. The glacier end is from three to six feet 
above sea level and is obviously not contributing much 
in the way of icebergs. Our camp was on the sea-ice 
at the junction. From the camp I made a rapid trav- 
erse to the southern slopes which further proved that 

142 


ICE SHEETS AND GLACIERS 


the glacier was nearly stagnant, though it seems to 
me that some differential movement is shown. Indeed, 
some movement was indicated by the stakes inserted 
by Wright and Debenham level with Cathedral Rocks, 
but the condition of the southern portion of the snout 
would seem to indicate that it is not transmitted in this 
portion of the glacier. The surface was seamed by 
numerous channels and cut into small pinnacles and 
thaw pools in a manner which showed that it had not 
altered its position for many years. On the northern 
side, however, there was a striking ridge of heaped 
up pressure-pinnacles which lead me to believe that 
there is motion in this moiety of the glacier. The 
sea-ice was free from the pressure ridges which we 
saw in Granite Harbor, hence the movement is less 
than in the Mackay Glacier. 

After walking for about half a mile over the sea-ice, 
south from our camp, I was surprised to find a pro- 
longation of the Glacier extended as a lateral tongue 
for four miles along the southern shores. It was neces- 
sary to cross this to reach the hill slopes. After cross- 
ing half a mile of the tongue, I reached the first mo- 
raine heap. There was no very definite arrangement 
of the débris along continuous ridges, but here and 
there oval piles of stone and gravel were scattered 
about the glacier. The ice was usually melted into a 
pool at their bases. The first moraine heap was seventy 
yards long and about ten feet high. It showed an ex- 
traordinary mingling of powder and large blocks, of 
which the latter were all somewhat rounded. Among 
the stones were specimens of gneiss, dolerite, felspar, 


143 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


porphyry, “Shap granite” and a few bowlders resem- 
bling troctolite. A few small striz were visible on 
some bowlders. The latter varied in size from four 
feet in diameter down to fine powder. At the side 
were pools filled with yellowish water. Here was one 
of the few occurrences of fine silt which I observed. 
Other heaps occurred close by, of irregular shape and 
not quite so high. About seventy yards away to the 
west appeared another ridge and between were a few 
big blocks. Possibly there was moraine between cov- 
ered by the ice, but the lack of débris on other glaciers 
makes me doubt it. The southern margin of the glacier 
was intersected by numerous small streams. Here on 
January 28th, 1911, the main stream was two feet wide 
and about one inch deep. There was, however, much 
greater flow along the northern bank of the glacier. 
There was an interesting zoning in the character of 
the débris covering the valley slopes hereabout. Next 
to the glacier was a belt at a low angle consisting of 
clayey silt containing stones one or two inches long. 
A hundred yards south this deposit had become a sort 
of gravel meal which is very characteristic of Ant- 
arctic surfaces. Then came a belt of sharp shingle or 
angular gravel, each piece being about two inches long 
with very little powder visible. Above this (to the 
south) were the coarser blocks, which became fairly 
continuous at about four hundred yards from the gla- 
cier edge. Here I was about two hundred feet above 
the ice. Just below the granite erratics, which were 
up to four feet in length, though mostly less than one 
foot, was a large patch of moss about sixty feet long 


144 


(Ch SHEETS AND GLACIERS 


and fifteen feet wide. There were apparently two gen- 
era present, one reminding me of the alga Ulva. 

Next day I climbed up the hill slopes just north of 
the snout of the Ferrar Glacier to a height of two 
thousand five hundred feet. The rock was a flaky 
gray granite with numerous dark dykes. The diabase 
morainic material of the ancient Ferrar Glacier seemed 
to reach about 1,900 feet above the present surface of 
the glacier, and in the lower portions of the climb were 
numerous erratics of garnet gneiss, pegmatite and 
varieties of basalt (see Figure 15). 

At my highest point I was well above the “shoulder” 
of the Kukri Hills though not near their summit, 
which is here about 3,500 feet. I could see that the 
hanging “curtain” glacier alongside originated in a 
nearly level snow field. A sharp arete separated its 
snow field from another to the west. Undoubtedly the 
upper slopes of the Kukri Hills form a sort of very flat 
roof-ridge. The resemblance is indeed very close to an 
old roof of galvanized iron where the individual sheets 
have sagged down between the rafters. Each of the 
depressions is a snow field occupying a shallow, elon- 
gated cirque. In fact these are evidently the senile 
cirques of the Ice Flood Age. 

Traverse up the Center—Here as elsewhere the 
lower glacier surface is much dissected by thaw water, 
etc., while the upper reaches are of hard blue ice. The 
glacier ice is in wide undulations and the surface drain- 
age runs diagonally from south to north across the 
glacier. About five miles above the snout on the 
twenty-ninth of January there were four shallow 


145 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


streams crossing the glacier in this fashion, with 
water three inches below the surface. This diagonal 
direction is probably due to the aspect of the midday 
sun, which eats back the “‘alcoves’”’ dissected in the ice 
and ultimately produces a north-south channel. 

Above the four small drainage streams, the surface 
degenerated. During the first mile we traversed three 
well-marked undulations, which were nearly abreast of 
the Overflow Glacier on the south side of the Ferrar. 
About one mile higher up was a relatively deep snow- 
covered valley crossing the glacier. On both sides were 
numerous crevasses, but the widest was less than three 
feet across. Most of them had definite snow bridges 
across. At our second halt we found a dead seal. 

The slope higher up was not steep, only 3° as 
measured roughly with my Brunton level, and the 
crevasses were insignificant. The lateral moraine be- 
came more prominent on the lower slopes as we 
ascended the glacier. Five miles above the Overflow 
the clear ice began to show through the snow cover. 

At 9:00 P.M. we reached the main moraine on the 
south side of the glacier between Descent Pass and 
Cathedral Rocks. Here we made a depot, and pro- 
ceeded west to reach the Taylor Glacier. The chief 
features hereabout were the beautiful tessellations on 
the north side of the Ferrar. These products of soli- 
fluction indicated that a heavy moraine covered the 
base of the northern cliffs. (See Figure 8.) 

We then had a stiff pull up the glacier, about 5° 
for a mile. The glacier ice was split into rough rec- 
tangles by cracks, which, however, did not hinder our 

146 


(CE SHEETS AND GLACIERS 


progress. A fine low-level tributary enters at grade 
just beyond Cathedral Rocks. The majority of the 
other tributaries have not entered at grade since the 
main glacier was some two thousand feet thicker. 

On the evening of the thirty-first of January 
we reached the top of the steeper portion of the Lower 
Ferrar and found ourselves on a small plateau about 
3,200 feet above sea level. On the south it received 
its main supply from the South Arm. From the west 
it receives no supply, as all the ice from the upper 
glacier seems to enter the Taylor Glacier (see Figure 
a 

There is no rock outcrop along the Ice Divide 
which separates the Lower Ferrar drainage from the 
Taylor Glacier drainage. The older maps showing 
the so-called Upper Ferrar* draining into the Lower 
Ferrar are quite incorrect, though it is possible that 
a little ice may flow almost due north from South Arm 
into Taylor Valley as Priestley suggests. 

In my opinion the two glaciers are “apposed”’ like 
Siamese twins. No doubt at some earlier period there 
was a flow across the divide and at a later date the 
two moieties, Ferrar and Taylor, will be quite dis- 
connected as they were in the earlier phases of the 
glacial hemicycle. 


THe BEARDMORE GLACIER 


No account of Antarctic glaciation should omit 
some reference to the largest glacier in the world. The 


4The so-called Upper Ferrar Glacier is really the upper half 
of the Taylor Glacier. (See Figure 15.) 


147 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


length of the Beardmore is about one hundred miles 
from Mount Hope at the base of Mount Darwin (see 
Figure 6). Its breadth varies from about eight miles 
near the bottom to twenty-five miles at the top. On the 
plateau the Ice Divide, where reached on the four trav- 
erses so far made by means of these outlet glaciers 
~ which cut through the horst, is only a few hundred 
miles from the coast. Hence most of the ice of the 
Plateau must escape on the other coasts, i.e. to the 
west of the horst, and not by way of glaciers like 
the Beardmore. A very noticeable feature is the gran- 
ite bar or knob of Mount Hope which lies in the outlet 
of the’ glacter jand is 2,750 feet high. Its origmgis 
obscure. The slope of the glacier is not very steep, 
being only seven thousand feet in one hundred miles or 
seventy feet to the mile. Markedly crevassed areas 
occur northeast of the Cloudmaker (84° 30’) and south- 
east of Mount Darwin (86° 40’). Wright believes 
that the velocity of the glacier is less than three feet 
a day in its most swiftly moving part. Little moraine 
material is visible on the glacier surface. Only small 
tributaries are received on the west side, but Keltie and 
Mill glaciers bring large supplies of ice from the east 
side near the upper portal. It is of interest that cirques 
occur in the region north of the Cloudmaker, and some 
of these, in Wright’s opinion, have been overwhelmed 
by the great glacier. 


THe HERBERTSON CLIFF GLACIER 


This may be taken as a type of the “dendritic” 
tributary glaciers (see Figure 20). It enters ap- 
148 


ICE SHEETS AND GLACIERS 


proximately at grade, and still supplies some ice to the 
Ferrar Glacier just south of its snout. Its supply of 
snow and ice occupies a saddle-hollow or large cirque 
above the valley slope, down which it descends with 
some crevasses and falls. It reaches the Ferrar Glacier 
in a series of large ice steps. Apparently it is strong 
enough to push the main glacier to one side for about 
one hundred yards, and it here raises a series of low 


Fic. 20.—THE HERBERTSON GLACIER PRESSING INTO THE 
FERRAR GLACIER ON THE LEFT. 


Looking east from the hill slope. 


ridges in the main glacier. However, there are in- 
dications that a permanent tide-crack or stream sepa- 
rates the two, and it is in the arrangement of the pres- 
sure-ridges that the chief interest lies. 

The snout of this small glacier is about one quarter 
of a mile wide, and along its western side is a well- 
marked silt-fan or delta. The lower portion of the 
Herbertson Glacier was at an angle of 27° and it was 
broken into steps each about twelve feet high. In the 


149 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


main Ferrar Glacier there were three or four low 
ridges due to the lateral pressure, which were about 
six feet only above the general level and very broad. 
These pressure ridges in the Ferrar Glacier were di- 
rectly opposite the Herbertson Glacier, and not some- 
what downstream as one would expect if the Ferrar 
were moving. Evidently the Ferrar Glacier is nearly 
stagnant along this wall, as indeed the ice tongue fixed 
to Bowers Piedmont a little lower down also indicates. 

I have elsewhere drawn attention to the similarity 
in structure between these “ice-steps’’ and ridges due 
to lateral pressure against the Ferrar and the fault 
blocks and graben of southeast Australia. It may be 
that pressure from the direction of New Zealand 
against the resistant shield of Western Australia has 


broken the Victorian Highlands into a similar series . 


of fault blocks or horsts, as the topography indicates. 


GLACIER TONGUES 


Four of these peculiar structures were examined 
by the writer in some detail. Six miles south of Cape 
Evans is the well-known tongue which is probably the 
sole example on Ross Island and may therefore be 
called the Ross Island Tongue (see J, Figure 19). 
Across MacMurdo Sound is the tongue forming the 
southeast extremity of the Ferrar Glacier. It differs 
considerably from the other three in that it is stagnant 
and asymmetric. In Granite Harbor on the southern 
coast is the small Harbor Tongue which is connected 
with the Wilson Piedmont. Finally the most impres- 
sive of the four is the Mackay Tongue which occupies 

150 


E— 


ICE. SHEETS AND GLACIERS 


a large portion of inner Granite Harbor. Much larger 
examples are known to the north of MacMurdo Sound; 
i.e. Drygalski in latitude 75° S. and the enormous 
tongues explored by Mawson’s expedition near the 
marareciic Citcle (66°. S.). “(See L, Figure: to.) 

The chief dimensions, etc., of some of these Tongues 
are given in the table following: 


Name | Locality |/eneth,/Breadth,/Meight) Origin 
Ross Island |nr. C. Evansinow 4 | 1% too |Glacterand drift 
Reerar i. .. «. ag? 2G S, 314 1 (av.)| 50 |Chiefly relic 
machen. 2... 77° S: 1% \% 20 |\Glacierand drift 
Moeckay) ...1 76° 57'S. ome ee 200 /|Glacier end 
Nordenskjold| 76° 10’ S. Se ee 100 at, 
Mrvealsky | 75° 30 S. 38 |14 200 y niaZ 
Minnis ..... ba S. 80 |18 200 a te 


Tue Ross IsLtanp TONGUE 


Early in 1g11 this tongue was about six miles long 
and from one to one and a half miles wide (see J, 
Figure 19). For a large part it was about one hundred 
feet above the sea, but this elevation varied consider- 
ably, for the surface is by no means level, but consists 
of a series of regular undulations running across the 
main axis. The difference in height between the top 
and bottom of these undulations may be as much as 
fifty feet. The sides are also as a rule lower than the 
central axis, and where a furrow reached the side it 
might be only fifteen or twenty feet above the sea-ice. 

The surface of the tongue consisted chiefly of solid 
ice with comparatively few crevasses on the south side 

151 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


but more on the northern side. On the twenty-fourth 
of January, 1911, I crossed it near the end and noted 
that it was cracked into large hexagonal areas and I 
wrote in my notebook, “It is marvellous that it has 
not gone out.” On the first of March, 1911, about one 
and one half miles broke off and drifted across Mac- 
Murdo Sound to remain for a while on the western 
coast near Granite Harbor. (See Figure 8.) 

We crossed it again without difficulty about halfway 
along its length on the eleventh of April, 1911. We 
found only a few crevasses more than one foot wide. 
Some areas were much worse than others and small 
irregular crevasses had made it look like a dish of 
drying starch. But there was no “Skauk” (or field of 
crevasses) as at the root of the Mackay Tongue. The 
snowdrifts piled up against the sides during winter but 
these were carried away with the sea-ice in the summer. 
This tongue helps to lock the sea-ice into the bays near 
its head. 

The undulating surface is probably connected with 
the method of formation of the tongue. Perhaps it is 
due to the ice “plug” being pushed through a restricted 
rocky gully or cirque at its root. It is difficult to ac- 
count for these undulations as due to the blizzard drifts, 
for the drifts take the form of beautifully smooth 
wedges. The undulations are from ten to eighty feet 
high, and there are four or five of them to the mile. 

It seemed possible at first that each undulation might 
be the expression of a year’s forward movement, for 
the motion is probably greater in summer. But this is 
not the full explanation, for Scott was of the opinion 

152 


ICE SHEETS AND GLACIERS 


that it had not altered much since 1902. Considerable 
accretions were, however, due to snowdrifts. This was 
evident in the fresh cross sections of the stranded 
tongue which we saw later near Cape Bernacchi. The 
snow sections showed great folds in the layers but 
were possibly only marginal accretions built up from 
ancient cornices. 

I am of the opinion, however, that the tongue is 
partly a relic of piedmont-ice buttressed by a submarine 
ridge or moraine near the coast. For the most part it 
is floating, as there is no tide crack between it and the 
sea-ice. In the past it was moving outwards and we 
see signs of this in the large undulations, but there 
seems no “‘driving-power” to cause these nowadays, 
for there is little ice immediately behind the tongue. 
Blizzard snows contribute somewhat to its substance, 
but do not obliterate the deep furrows which form 
the typical indented margin of the tongue. (The 
structure of the Drygalski Tongue is referred to in 
the next section.) 


fue Ress lee-SHEetr 


This structure has aroused more interest than any 
other single glacier unit in Antarctica. No colossal 
sheets of ice of this type are known in Arctic seas, 
possibly because the temperatures and conditions of 
snow supply are very different in the north. Little is 
known of the other two large examples, i.e. the Filch- 
ner Ice Shelf at the head of the Weddell Sea, and the 
Shackleton Ice Shelf near Mawson’s West Base (longi- 
tude 100° E.). The Ross Shelf occupies the southern 


153 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


end of the Ross Sea (see Figure 6). It is triangular 
in plan and is about five hundred miles wide by five 
hundred miles deep. The terminal face runs nearly 
east and west in latitude 78° S. Here it effectively 
bars the progress of ships and here only is the term 
Ross Barrier really applicable. This “sea wall’ varies 
in height from six to one hundred and sixty feet above 
the sea. 

The northern edge is floating for most of its extent, 
as is shown by the fact that the “Nimrod,’ when 
moored to the ice, moved up and down with the tide in 
unison with the ice shelf. Captain Scott in the hut 
called our attention to the extreme tenuity of this 
sheet of ice. For if it be assumed that it is about seven 
hundred feet thick, this is a very small dimension com- 
pared with its extent of one hundred and fifty thousand 
square miles. He compared it in shape to a sheet of 
paper floating on the surface of the sea. The surface 
is slightly undulating, but where it approaches land at 
the margins, or where glaciers enter it, it is thrown into 
pressure waves some forty feet high and one or two 
miles from crest to crest. Its rate of movement has 
been determined from the movement of a depot laid 
down by Scott in 1903. The rate is about four hun- 
dred and ninety-two yards a year in the portion one 
hundred miles south of Ross Island. Here also it was 
determined that eight feet two inches of snow (with 
a density of 0.5) had been deposited in six and one 
half years. : 

Sir Edgeworth David has given a good deal of at- 
tention to the origin of the Ross Ice Shelf. He bases 


154 


a Se 


i Ss eee eee 


fer. SHEETS AND GLACIERS 


his conclusions largely on the character of the confluent 
ice just north of the Drygalski Tongue (see L, Fig- 
mre 19). 

Here the Larsen, Reeves, Priestley, and Campbell 
glaciers all send down ice which unites to form a 
more or less uniform sheet with the northern edge of 
the Drygalski Tongue. Strains have produced vertical 


ye a eres 
ae heft on Fluenf- se IEP 
! tater ‘ce pricar Maron Key NW, 


DRYGALSH 
> TONGVE 


450 miles eae 


Fic. 21.—A VERTICAL SECTION THROUGH “CONFLUENT 

ICE” AND DryGALSKI TONGUE (SEE Fic. 19 aT L). B. 

VERTICAL SECTION ALONG FRONT FACE OF Ross ICE SHELF, 
LOOKING NORTH. 


(Both after David.) 


cracks in this sheet, and in places it seems to be com- 
posed only of thin sea-ice, for David found salt water 
at the base of certain curious gullies or dongas in 
the ice surface. In the confluent ice, the thicker por- 
tions correspond to where the ice streams enter from 
the glaciers behind the sheet (see A, Figure 21). 
David considers that the Ross Ice Shelf is merely 
confluent ice on a grander scale. He shows a cross 


155 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


section of the Ross Shelf (see B, Figure 21), which 
suggested that the higher portions of the shelf are 
sunk deeper in the sea. The highest point noted on 
the Barrier in 1908 was 240 feet above the sea. If we 
assume that the density of the ice is eight-tenths that 
of water, then the lower edge of the ice will be deep 
sunk in the water as shown in the diagram. If the 
density is greater (nine-tenths of water), then the 
lower edge of the shelf is shown by the lower broken 
line. These higher portions may therefore represent 
the portions directly fed to the Ross Shelf by huge 
outlet glaciers of the south, such as the Barne, Shackle- 
ton, and Beardmore glaciers. The regions between may 
be largely composed of snow, which fell on the shelf, 
or in part of frozen sea-ice. He compares the whole 
structure to a shield formed of a wickerwork frame and 
covered with hide. Here the rods represent the glacier 
tongues, the smaller osiers the pressure-ridges, while 
the drift and fallen snow represent the hide. This 
theory agrees with the section shown in Figure 19 at N. 
Obviously portions of the Ross Shelf may resemble (or 
have formerly resembled) Figure 19 at M. Where 
Amundsen’s and Byrd’s headquarters are situated, it 
seems likely that the structure locally is like Figure 19 
at O. The whole front has retreated about thirty miles 
since the survey of Ross. At the Ice Flood Epoch it is 
likely that the Barrier was one thousand feet above sea 
level, and at that time it was probably resting largely on 
the sea floor. This point is also discussed in the next — 
chapter. 


GHAPTER: VITI 
OCEANOGRAPHY AND SEA-ICE 


BATHY METRY 


N the following brief account of various character- 

istics of Antarctic oceanography obviously only a 
few of the leading features can be discussed. Perhaps 
the most complete work in this field is that done by the 
German expedition of 1902 under Professor Drygalski, 
and much of the following data on currents is derived 
from his research. The effect of conditions in Ant- 
arctica upon the climates of the settled lands of the 
world, more particularly those in the south temperate 
areas, is profound. We have seen that with the ex- 
ception of the South Victoria Horst, the continental 
coast as a whole consists of the icy margins of the 
huge Ice Cap which end in abrupt walls. From these 
margins break off the great tabular icebergs, to be 
considered later. Fringing these walls in winter is a 
belt of pack ice, which breaks away in summer and is 
carried north to chill the waters of the South Pacific, 
South Atlantic, and South Indian oceans. Currents 
carry this chilled water almost to the equator, notably 
on the western coasts of the southern continents. There 
is every indication, that the changes from drought 
years to good years in southern settlements are in no 


157 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


small degree controlled by the train of events in distant 
Antarctica.* 

Mawson has pointed out that soundings are espe- 
cially valuable in connection with the possibility of 
islands in Antarctic waters. Where sea and land are 
covered with ice it is very easy to miss an island, but 
soundings should show where such land-forms are 
probable. (I have already referred to the shallow 
soundings near the site of Wilkes’ doubtful landfalls. ) 
Sonic depth-finders, using electrical signals and the 
time of return of their echoes, are especially suited for 
such work. Moreover, the delineation of the sub- 
merged continental shelf gives a real indication of 
the boundary of the rock areas beneath the great con- 
tinental ice cap, and this again can be ascertained with 
some accuracy by careful soundings. 

The soundings in East Antarctica reveal some curi- 
ous features. I have based the diagrams in Figure 22 
on that invaluable map published in 1928 by the Ameri- 
can Geographical Society. The shelf around Antarctica 
seems to be submerged distinctly deeper than those 
around most other continents. Off the Weddell Sea 
the sharp angle between the gentle continental slope 
and the steep dip to the abyss lies between six hundred 
and one thousand meters below the surface of the sea. 
In the diagram the submarine contour for five hundred 
meters is charted, so far as our data permit, for three 
especially interesting regions. In general this contour 


1 See my discussion, “Climatic Relations Between Antarctica and 
Australia,” Problems of Polar Research (Amer. Geog. Soc., New 
York, 1928). 

158 


OCEANOGRAPHY AND SEA-ICE 


{Nitin 
OT 


| 


Fic. 22.—-BATHYMETRIC MAPS OF East ANTARCTICA. 
(Based on the large map produced by the American Geographical 


Society in 1928.) 
159 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


lies less than fifty miles from the coast, or at any rate 
from the edge of the ice cap. But in the three localities 
mapped, off Queen Mary Land, off Adelie Land, and 
in the Ross Sea, these shallow soundings extend much 
farther out to sea. Furthermore, in all three cases 
there is deeper water separating a more or less wide 
submarine ridge from the coastal shelf. Off Queen 
Mary Land this ridge is three hundred miles long and 
thirty miles wide. A similar structure with similar 
dimensions lies off the coast of Adelie Land. A large 
part of the Ross Sea is unusually shallow for southern 
waters. Here a large submerged plateau or bank 500 
miles by 140 miles extends from Cape Adare to Edward 
VII Land, with several knobs on its surface which 
approach within some 250 meters of the surface. I 
have ventured to name these interesting land-forms 
after Captain J. K. Davis, Sir Douglas Mawson, and 
Commander Harry Pennell, R.N. The latter com- 
manded the “Terra Nova’’ on her Antarctic voyages, 
carried out much oceanographic work in the Ross Sea, 
and died in command of his ship early in the World 
War. 

The reason for this condition of the sea floor is not 
obvious. Possibly these shallow areas, which roughly 
fringe the continent, are of the nature of vast terminal 
moraines, deposited when the great ice sheet extended 
from one to three hundred miles farther from the 
Pole. It is rather a coincidence that the largest ice 
shelf and the largest glacier tongues are associated with 
these abnormally shallow seas. Thus off Queen Mary 
Land is the Shackleton Ice Shelf, which ends in an ice. 

160 


OCEANOGRAPHY AND SEA-ICE 


tongue two hundred miles from the main Ice Cap (see 
Figure 22). At the other end of the submerged ridge 
is a large ice shelf to the west of Davis Sea. Off 
Adelie Land is that curious pair of giant tongues, the 
Mertz and Ninnis glaciers, of which the latter is so ir- 
regular that it has some of the appearance of a relic of 
a sheet of ice shelf. So also the great Ross Ice Shelf 
lies just south of the submerged plateau of the Ross 
Sea. At the Ice Flood Epoch possibly the sea waters 


LLILL 


NJ 


LLL LITLE 
SEU Ulli 


‘4 
60 50 4 
Fic. 23.—VERTICAL SECTION OF OCEAN NORTH OF GAUSS- 
BERG, SHOWING STRATIFICATION OF WATER. 


Warm waters are dotted. Depths in meters. (After Drygalski.) 


were locked up in the enlarged ice cap to such a degree 
that the shallowest part of the Pennell Bank was only 
two hundred feet below the then level of the sea. There 
is little doubt that the much larger Ross Ice Shelf at 
that epoch would be driven high out of the water over 
this shallow bank. 


OcEAN CURRENTS 


Drygalski shows that the effective cooling of Ant- 
arctic waters is confined to certain layers of the 
southern ocean. He gives a section of the Indian 


161 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Ocean, from Mauritius to the Gaussberg (approxi- 
mately along longitude 80° E.), which I reproduce in 
the adjoining figure. There is seen to be a massive 
intermediate layer of warm water from the tropics, 
which separates cold layers above and below both flow- 
ing from the Antarctic to the equator. There is an 
upper cold layer (of temperature —1.8° C.) about 
four hundred meters thick which gradually sinks below 
the warm surface waters to the north of 55° S. latitude 
to a depth of one thousand meters. Then, below this 
is a layer of tropical water possibly some two or three 
degrees warmer which is about 1,200 meters thick. 
Then below this again, reaching to the bottom, 4,000 to 
5,000 meters, is a mass of somewhat colder “bottom 
water” due to a mixing of the very cold upper layer 
with the tropical water. It is slowly making its way 
toward the equator. The warm layer reaches to the 
shoulder of the continental shelf, but does not touch the 
icy walls of the ice-cap some fifty or one hundred miles 
farther south. Its salinity is considerably higher than 
that of the cold layers. There is a thin indefinite layer 
of surface water, which differs from place to place in 
regard to temperature and salinity. It is derived in 
part from the melting of pack ice and icebergs. 

The dominant winds play a great part in the direc- 
tion of the upper layers of water. Around the Ant- 
arctic these blow fairly steadily from east to west. 
The Ferrel Effect also tends to deviate the currents to 
the left. Hence this cool surface layer about two hun- 
dred meters deep tends to hold the drift ice together, 
and to keep it near the continent. As regards deep sea 

162 


es ~ =F 


ae ae eee 


OCEANOGRAPHY AND SEA-ICE 


deposits, there is a special southern zone of glacio- 
marine sediments, which have been deposited from 
glacier ice, icebergs, etc., during several hundred thou- 
sand years. This zone extends as far north as the ice 
drifts. Diatoms are very plentiful in Antarctic waters 
but they are shrouded by the larger bulk of the glacial 
débris. However, just north of this latter zone is a 
belt of diatom-ooze, which in its turn extends some- 
what farther northward below cold currents. The 
warmer waters supply globigerina (foraminiferal) 
ooze, and this extends farther south below warm cur- 
rents. To quote Drygalski, “the distribution of the 
bottom sediments furnishes evidence of the develop- 
ment of the present and former currents.”’ 


FORMATION OF SEA-ICE 


According to C. S. Wright, the first stage in the 
formation of sea-ice in the open sea is the production 
of myriads of small ice plates in the body of the water. 
These form a thick scum, and are akin in origin to the 
frazil ice which forms in fresh-water rivers, or at- 
tached to ropes in cooling sea water. The ice is much 
less saline than the sea water, and the saltier water is 
squeezed out, as it were, and sinks. This frazil ice 
appears on the surface of the Antarctic seas about the 
end of March. The crystals are squarish in shape and 
up to half an inch across. The layer of horizontal 
plates grows thicker and forms a feltlike mass. It is 
not rigid owing to included layers of salty liquid. The 
writer vividly remembers Captain Scott jumping up 
and down on new sea-ice, only three or four inches 


163 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


thick, to test its strength. The ice undulated like rub- 
ber, but did not break. 

Later ice crystals in the sea develop as vertical plates 
having a somewhat triangular form. Often there is a 
layer of square plates about two inches thick above a 
layer of more or less vertical plates which is some 
eight or ten inches in thickness. It is these wedges of 
vertical plates which give rise to the fibrous appearance 
of new sea-ice, and this is partly due to the layers of 
air entangled between the crystals. A very important 
result of this structure is that sea-ice tends rather 
readily to break into cakes along these vertical planes of 
weakness. On the under side of older ice there is a 
great tendency for melting to occur irregularly. Holes 
one or two inches deep penetrate the ice, primarily along 
these planes of weakness, where the ice is particularly 
saline. 

David and Priestley recorded the history of the sea- 
ice in MacMurdo Sound off Cape Royds in 1908. At 
the end of February Pancake Ice developed from 
countless ice crystals which had given the sea the ap- 
pearance of paraffin wax. “Little by little these crystals 
felted themselves together into small cakes, which 
jostled by the gentle breezes continually collided along 
their growing edges. The latter being very flexible 
became gradually turned up to form raised rims, and 
the whole pancake became slightly saucer shaped.” 
Often a large pancake would be formed from a lot of 
little pancakes jammed together. 

Very curious structures called “ice flowers’ develop 
during a sudden fall of temperature, when the sea-ice 

164 


OCEANOGRAPHY AND SEA-ICE 


freezes rapidly. On March 16th the sea was at a tem- 
perature of 20° F. while the air was about 6° F. The 
sea was covered with frost smoke ‘as though it had 
been boiling.’ On March roth the temperature fell to 
—o9° F., the surface froze rapidly, and a splendid crop 
of “flowers” resulted. Later as the temperature rose 
the centers of the flowers melted, for they were formed 
of saline solutions squeezed up from below, while the 
“tips” of the flowers persisted longer as they were due 
in part to the frost smoke. Some of the “petals” of 
the flowers were plates two inches across. 

The ice over MacMurdo Sound was nine to ten 
inches thick during the early days of March, 1908, but 
blew out with the blizzard mentioned above. The next 
ice layer grew to a thickness of eighteen inches, when 
it was removed early in April, except a patch which 
held in near Cape Royds. A few days later tue final 
freezing occurred which persisted all the winter. The 
sea-ice was about five feet thick at the end of July, and 
grew to a thickness of six or seven feet by the end of 
September. Thereafter the cold air had no great effect 
on the water beneath the ice, which protected it from 
further cooling. It stayed at a temperature of about 
29° F. although the air only six feet above it was 
ae tetaperature Of — 51° F., i.e. S0° colder. Durmeg 
the winter I often thought that a diving-bell would be 
a very comfortable dwelling place, at any rate as far as 
temperature was concerned. 


165 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Bay Ice or Fast Ice 


The general principles governing the formation of 
bay ice are much the same as in the case of pack ice. 
But owing to the proximity of land, a number of 
special forms are developed. These include pressure 
ridges, shear cracks, and cloven-hoof ice. The ice foot 
also may be briefly considered here. All these features 
were well shown in Granite Harbor, from which the 
following examples are taken. 

A prominent feature in the sea-ice (near land) is 
the presence of permanent breaks to which Scott and 
Wilson gave the name “shear crack.” These are due 
primarily to the tension in the sea-ice existing between 
two islands, or an island or cape or an ice tongue and 
cape. The sea-ice is of course raised or lowered by 
the tide, and is affected no doubt by currents and winds 
to a lesser degree. Thus there were numerous fairly 
permanent examples off Cape Evans. Their features 
were all much the same. The two edges of the broken 
sea-ice (somewhere near six feet thick) would grind 
together and large fragments would fall between the 
moving masses. In places the adjoining edges were 
pressed together so strongly that the edges upturned, 
forming a wall of ice six feet high. Even in the 
middle of winter one could always see open water in 
these shear cracks, which were accordingly favorite 
places for seals. 

An interesting series of nearly a dozen shear cracks 
due to the pressure of the Mackay Tongue was ob- 
served in Granite Harbor. They are shown in Figure 


166 


———————————— 


OCEANOGRAPHY, AND SEA-ICE 


24. The Mackay Tongue moves in summer nearly a 


yard a day. Such motion obviously prevents bay ice 
from being locked to the land, and makes it probable 
that much of the bay ice is not more than a few seasons 
old. The crack running northwest from Cape Geology 
was up to twenty feet wide in places with islands of 
ice floating within it, which made it possible to cross 


4 
, 
/ | 
M) 
a 


/ 
So 
ag UNM yt, 


any g 
foyrow ‘ a 
u 
m 
ooo Vyinid BN? 
Sy Saul aah, 


ef 


Bie 
SEA ICE 


i] 
U 
Se 


1 


a 
\ 
\ 
ct 
: gnbuoy, I 


dost Disappointment Z, a \ 
< SEA ICE 

Main oo Features of the Mackay Glacier and Granite Harbour shou 

; Nunatakker; unakoller, Ice-Flood Floor, Facets, Gums & Mackay Ice Tongue.(Looking West) 


Fic. 24.—BLock DIAGRAM OF GRANITE HARBOR- 
(By permission of John Murray.) 


with sledges. Some cracks had peculiar deeply serrate 
edges which indicated where they had been torn apart 
by the tension. 


PRESSURE RIDGES 


These were very interesting structures due to the 
pressure either of land-ice or sea-ice upon capes, ete. 
The writer made a careful study of a set of fifteen 


167 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


such ridges just off Cape Geology (see Figure 24). 
They were from one hundred to three hundred feet 
long and from three to ten feet above the level of the 
ice. Each ridge closely resembles a capsized canoe, and 
they recall the earth folds in the Juras or Appalachians. 
Between the ridges were their complements, the Pres- 
sure Pools, where the sea-ice was warped down below 
water level. The largest ridge was where the pressure 
was greatest, i.e. where Cape Geology projected far- 
thest. The ridges were parallel to each other, with 
their axes about northeast-southwest, or nearly at right 
angles to the shear cracks described above. This six- 
feet ice can be buckled into remarkably sharp folds— 
but usually the apex of the fold cracks under the strain. 
These ridges changed somewhat in form during the 
month we were surveying Granite Harbor. Other ex- 
amples have been noted on a larger scale where the 
Ross Ice Shelf presses onto Cape Crozier, and just 
south of Cape Evans where a small glacier enters the 
Bay Ice near Turk’s Head. 

In very sheltered bays, such as the drowned Punch 
Bowl cirque in Granite Harbor (just southeast of the 
Flat Iron in Figure 24), or again on the southeast side 
of Cape Roberts, I came across peculiar forms of bay 
ice, which do not seem to be described elsewhere. Here 
a mass of old ice shaped just like a hoof has been 
driven up into the bay presumably by pressure from 
the later sea-ice. In accommodating itself to the smaller 
width of its new position it has split down the center, 
hence the name Cloven Hoof. In the Punch Bowl 
cirque the sheet of ice was about six hundred yards 


168 


— 


OCEANOGRAPHY AND SEA-ICE 


wide and eight hundred yards long along the central 
split. The inner end had been shoved up some six 
feet by pressure from the east. The whole structure 
was floating. Another example occurred just south- 
west of Cape Roberts. (See Punch Bowl, Figure 24.) 


Ice Foot 


This structure is a narrow shelf of ice adhering to 
the coast line. It varies in width from a foot or two 
to a belt of ice one hundred yards wide. It forms best 
on shores which have a gentle slope, and roughly speak- 
ing the width depends on the extent of shallow water 
within the one-fathom line. 

Its formation is closely bound up with the position 
of the tide crack, and with the direction of the pre- 
vailing winds. As the sea-ice becomes thicker the dis- 
tance of the tide crack from the shore tends to become 
larger, for the maximum shear in the ice is, of course, 
just where the moving sea-ice reaches the solid rock. 

The sea-ice between the tide crack and the rock is, 
of course, held firmly by its attachment to the latter, 
and this fixed belt of sea-ice constitutes the ice foot. 

From the above considerations it will appear that 
the ice foot is in general wider where the shore is 
shallow, and this is generally true. Also where the 
shore consists of a vertical cliff there is rarely an ice 
foot, and the reason is obvious, for the cliff itself forms 
the logical boundary between moving ice and fixed 
coast. 

But the above simple explanation is complicated by 
the action of wind and spray. In gales, when the tem- 


169 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


perature is well below 28° F. (the freezing point of 
sea water), the water congeals as soon as its motion 
is arrested, and this occurs when it has been dashed 
on to the ice foot. The natural consequence is that on 
all exposed coasts the ice foot becomes much thicker, 
often much broader and in general much less level and 
less like an esplanade. 

Since the ice walls at the front of a glacier are al- 
most universally vertical, when they happen to reach 
the sea, there is never an ice foot along a glacier coast. 

Moreover, there is a very considerable elasticity in a 
glacier, even though it be five hundred feet thick. 
Hence there is usually no tide crack at the distal end 
of a floating glacier tongue. As the proximal end is 
approached, where it merges into the fixed ice over the 
land, the tide crack begins to appear and close to the 
root of the tongue it is as wide and striking a feature 
as along a fixed piedmont glacier or a rock coast. 


WIDTH OF THE Pack ICE 


This varies very greatly from year to year, and this 
is perhaps the chief difficulty in determining programs 
of an expedition’s work. Thus the “Nimrod” in Janu- 
ary, 1908, met with no pack at the mouth of the Ross 
Sea, though enormous fleets of bergs were passed in 
the latitude of the pack. In December or January the 
pack ice is here found between latitude 66° S. and 
latitude 72° S., though these limits have been exceeded 
at times. When the “Terra Nova” entered the pack on 
the ninth of December, 1910, we hoped to be through 
it in a few days. But we were still within it on 

170 


| 
| 
| 
| 


OCEANOGRAPHY AND SEA-ICE 


Christmas Day, and at times the ship (in spite of all its 
buffeting of the pack) was farther from Antarctica on 
a succeeding day owing to the general northward drift 
of the pack. On the twenty-seventh of December we 
were still drifting aimlessly in the thick pack, for 
Scott was afraid to waste coal by raising steam if no 
sign of a “lead” were apparent. However, towards 
the evening of the twenty-ninth we began to hope that 
the pack was showing similar features to those we met 
on entering. Very beautiful were some of the piled-up 
pressure-blocks. [I remember one of the nature of a 
glacier-table. A flat-domed slab some three feet across 
was perched on a slender support above the floe. Pend- 
ent from the table were numerous long icicles, conse- 
quent on the warm weather. The lower surface of the 
table owing to repeated reflection was a beautiful ultra- 
marine, which was seen through a curtain of icicles. 
The whole structure reminded me of one of those 
resplendent medusze which float placidly on a tropic 
sea with their tentacles hanging from the fringe of 
the “umbrella.” 

Hereabouts the floe became thinner and more uni- 
form. It was broken into wide subangular pieces with 
vertical sides, and at nine o’clock we entered a wide 
lane where the calm water of the “leads’’ was replaced 
by short choppy waves. Then we met an area of “pan- 
cake ice’ with rounded outlines and upturned edges, 
and finally just at midnight we crossed several belts 
of east-west brash ice and at long length entered the 
open Ross Sea in latitude 69%4° S. We had traversed 


175 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


490 miles of ice, though the average is 288 miles at 
this season, while in 1915 the “Aurora” only met with 
one mile of pack. 

As experience in traveling through the pack ice has 
accumulated, it is clear that the worst conditions occur 


32 OF 
SOUTH= 


Oo 
_ 
19) 

§ 


Fic. 25.—VARIATIONS IN WIDTH OF PACK ICE OFF QUEEN 
Mary LAnp. 


Note the Shackleton Ice Shelf, possibly buttressed by glacier 
ice. (After Mawson and Davis.) 


on coasts facing the east and the dominant winds. 

The drifts of the three ships, the ““Deutschland,” “En- 

durance,”’ and ‘Aurora,’ show clearly that the ice 

moves to the northwest and tends to pile up on the west 

coast of the Ross Sea and on the west coast of the 
ype 


“Ciel ale, 


Pe ee Oe a 


OCEANOGRAPHY AND SEA-ICE 


Weddell Sea. This led to the “‘marooning”’ of Scott’s 
northern party at Terra Nova Bay in 1912, and made 
it impossible to pick up the writer’s western party on 
the same coast—though the latter party managed to get 
back the shorter distance to the hut before the advent 
of winter. It seems clear that ships entering either 
of these seas should keep down the east side of the seas, 
where open water remains much later than on the 
western side. 

As Priestley points out, the weather which produces 
most pack ice is rather a stormy winter than a cold 
winter. In Robertson Bay he watched pack ice torm- 
ing and then being blown north again and again. He 
states that sufficient ice to fill the Bay at least five times 
was produced in 1911. In a calm cold winter, only 
one layer of pack ice is formed and then freezing prac- 
tically ceases. It seems likely that the excessively 
windy conditions of IgII, 1912, 1913 would result in 
an unusual width and massiveness of the pack ice. 
Captain J. K. Davis reported continual broadening of 
the pack ice off Adelie Land and westward between 
I9g12 and 1914. This is shown in the annexed figure, 
and elsewhere (see footnote p. 158) I discuss the bear- 
ing which this change in the volume of the pack ice 
may have on the climate of Australia. 

Turning to the other side of Antarctica a valuable 
table has been compiled by R. G. Mossman’ which 
shows how the bay ice varied in Scotia Bay in the 
South Orkneys during the twelve years 1903 to 1914. 


2See the Geographical Journal (London), December, 1916. 
173 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


This is in latitude 61° S. and the bay is two miles wide 
and faces to the southeast. 


YEAR ScottA Bay CLOSED | MonTHS 
1 (oc es een April to November | 8 
RIMGAG Ss, hiee sss May to January | 9 
eRe Jit Pol May to September | 4 
POMOOE Se ieicvsic ic oid June to December 7 
RET GE Ste June to January | 8 
LOD Lh 5. eee July and August 2 
TOU e «i eee June to October 5 
TOIO! 202 eee: August to November 4 
TUE cst ores July to September 3 
VORA 7s yn elke June to January 8 
i 0) Re ae oa” June to November 6 
TOMA So Ute siee June to December 7 
ICEBERGS 


On the evening of the eighth of December, Ig1o, 
in latitude 63° 30’ we saw our first icebergs in the 
shape of two silvery pyramids glistening in the setting 
sun. This was about seventy miles north of where we 
met the pack ice. At two o’clock on the next day there 
were twenty-seven bergs visible, and this number rather 
decreased as we moved south. The bergs expose more 
surface both to currents and winds than does the pack 
ice, which is the reason why they outstrip the pack ice 
in their march to the north. Occasionally a berg 
reaches Australian waters, and one was seen right in 
the Australian Bight by Captain Grant Smith (in 1926, 
I believe). In Arctic seas there are practically no icy 
coasts as in Antarctica, and the bergs are the result 
generally of the outflow of relatively small glaciers. 


174 


ee ee ee ee 


—————— ee 


OCEANOGRAPHY AND SEA-ICE 


Hence they are much more irregular and crevassed 
than the southern tabular bergs. Still the southern 
examples are often tilted, owing to fragments breaking 
off asymmetrically; or they may be domed and derived 
perhaps from the undulations of a small glacier tongue. 
Many of the bergs are traversed by huge vertical cracks, 
between which portions seem to have slipped down 
forming “graben,” in geological language. (These 
cracks originated in the land-ice as already shown in 
Figure 21.) On one occasion I saw a huge isolated 
column rising one hundred feet into the air just like 
the “Old Man of Hoy” and like that rock resulting 
from wave erosion acting on vertical cracks. It was 
attached to the adjacent tabular berg by the submerged 
“ram” of the iceberg, which is such a danger to ship- 
ping. Often the cracks weather into caves. 

Many bergs are grounded near the Antarctic coast 
and several of these were closely examined near Cape 
Evans. The wonderful Tunnel Berg, of which the 
photograph by Ponting has so often been reproduced 
nad a varied life history. When we first saw it in 
January, 1911, the berg projected about one hundred 
feet above the sea-ice and was pierced by an oval tunnel 
about fifty feet high and twenty feet across. I have 
little doubt that this picturesque tunnel was a thaw- 
water channel (cut out of the original glacier) of the 
same type as we saw on the Koettlitz Glacier. This 
mass of ice broke away and floated so that the “bedding 
planes” (as we may term them) were now nearly ver- 
tical, as also was the tunnel. During the winter we 
may assume that a large fragment broke off the south 


175 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


of the berg, and so it had taken up a new position by 
September. The old water line on the berg is usually 
indicated by a smooth concavity cut by the waters under 
the surrounding pack ice. 

No bergs seen in the Arctic rival those of Antarctic 
seas in size. On the last voyage of the “Terra Nova” 
in January, 1913, Captain Pennell passed close to a 
berg twenty-one miles long (in latitude 64° 15’ S.). 
But perhaps the largest recently seen was that meas- 
ured by Mawson in 1912 off the Mertz Glacier, which 
appears to have been forty miles long. It was seen 
again next year about fifty miles to the northwest of 
the glacier. Most of the bergs are formed of “cloudy 
bubbly ice’ (in Priestley’s phrase) of which the typical 
ice tongues are formed. The ice is, however, often 
stratified showing its origin as snow in the distant past. 
But sometimes true bergs formed of névé were seen. 
Here the ice consists of loosely coherent grains, each 
about one-sixth of an inch in diameter, with much air 
between. 

Priestley has classified icebergs into the following 
groups : | 


(a) Tabular bergs, derived from ice shelf or tongue 

(b) Glacier bergs, irregular, broken by crevasses 

(c) Unconformity bergs, partly blue ice, partly névé 

(d) Ice Island bergs, domed bergs easily mistaken for 
islands 

(ce) Névé bergs, from regions of unusually heavy snowfall 

(f) Weathered bergs, overturned, irregular and of ob- 
scure origin 


176 


CHAPTER FX 
CLIMATOLOGY 


PoLAR CLIMATES 


LL the expeditions in this century have realized 
the paramount importance of a knowledge of 
the meteorology and climatology of the Antarctic. 
Among these the Belgian expedition included Arctow- 
ski, the French expedition Rouch, the German expedi- 
tions Bidlingmaier and Barkow, the Scotch expedition 
Mossman, and the Swedish expedition Bodman. The 
British expeditions have been accompanied by L. 
Bernacchi, Sir Edgeworth David, G. Ainsworth, and 
especially G. C. Simpson. The writer went south as 
a government official in the Commonwealth Weather 
Service and was in charge of the station while Simp- 
son was sledging. C. S. Wright carried on the work 
during 1912. As mentioned previously the chief aim 
of Sir Hubert Wilkins’ expeditions is to make prepara- 
tions for a complete meteorological survey of the Ant- 
arctic continent. 

While the Antarctic climate has a great bearing upon 
the climates of the southern continents, the latter are 
so far distant that there is no similarity in the climates 
themselves. Thus Africa is 2,400 miles away, Aus- 
tralia 1,800 and America about 1,100 miles from 
the main mass of the southern continent. As re- 


177 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


gards data we have lengthy records from the South 
Orkneys (61° S.) where a station was founded by 
Bruce in 1903 and has been maintained since by the 
Argentine Government. Within the Antarctic realm 
the longest records come from MacMurdo Sound, 
where so many expeditions have now wintered. Cape 
Adare and Adelie Land each have two years of records. 
Near Gaussberg we have Drygalski’s and Wild’s rec- 
ords and near Framheim, Amundsen’s and Byrd’s. 
The Weddell Sea has a number of records mostly kept 
on shipboard except for those associated with the 
Swedish expedition. The weather in the seas and 
coasts west of Graham Land has also been recorded, 
with intervals, over a number of years. (These are 
shown in Figure 34.) For the vast bulk of Antarctica 
we have no records. 

We may perhaps commence the discussion of the 
South Polar climate by considering what a polar cli- 
mate means, ana whether the Antarctic climate is as 
severe as that of the Arctic. There are a number of 
criteria which may be considered as defining a polar 
climate. They are more often considered in the north- 
ern realm than in the southern. For instance, in Arctic 
regions one good standard is the absence of any real 
tree growth. Since there is not only no tree growth, 
but also no growth of any thing higher than a moss 
in Antarctica, it is clear that we cannot usefully employ 
this criterion in the south. Mecking’* has devised a 
formula which considers the warmest and _ coldest 
months at a locality in determining if it has a polar 


1 Geography of Polar Regions, p. 73, New York, 1928. 


178 


Se ee 


CLIMATOLOGY 


Gumate. This formula is W==9° —o.1 C. Thus in 
Siberia if the coldest month (C) has a temperature of 
—40° C., then (by substitution) we see that the 
warmest month (W) of the place can be (9 + 4) or 
+13° C. and yet it may be included within the polar 
belt. In Staten Island (near Cape Horn) the cold- 
est month is +2.5, so that the warmest should be 
(9 —0.25) or 8.75, which is a trifle colder than the 
hottest month at Staten Island. It is therefore just 
outside the polar climatic area. At Cape Farewell 
(Greenland) the coldest month is —5.7°, the hottest 
+6.2° C. It falls within the polar climates, though 
here birches and willows grow in “forests” to the 
height of over twelve feet. Some climatologists accept 
a summer temperature of 9° C. (or 48° F.) as limit- 
ing polar regions. This isotherm is plotted in Figure 
26 at A and we see that all Antarctica and the sur- 
rounding ocean fall well within it. Furthermore the 
area with a summer temperature lower than this is 
much larger in the South Polar regions than it is in 
the north. (See-B, Figure 26-) 

Considering the northern and southern regions, there 
is no comparison in the general environments owing to 
the absence of all plant life in Antarctica; there is no 
land animal life (excluding a few insects) and there- 
fore no human settlers if we may except a few ex- 
plorers! Yet the average annual temperatures are not 
very different, while northern Siberia has colder rec- 
ords than anything experienced by explorers in a south- 
ern winter. The whole difference lies in the summer 
temperatures and this is best indicated in the diagrams 


179 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


shown herewith (see Figure 26). Since most life 
hibernates during the winter in polar regions, it is of 
relatively little importance how cold the climate in this 
season becomes. Hence the very large area with a 


Fic. 26—SUMMER AND WINTER TEMPERATURES IN ANT- 
ARCTIC AND ARCTIC REGIONS. 


Compare isotherms of 48 deg. F. in A and B, showing the very 
cold summer in the Antarctic. (After G. Philip.) 


temperature below freezing in winter around the North 
Pole (see D, Figure 26), has little effect on animal or 
plant growth. 
We have no data as to the temperatures in the heart 
of the Antarctic continent except in midsummer. The 
180 


CLIMATOLOGY 


two parties at the South Pole around the New Year 
IQII-I2 experienced temperatures of —22° F. and 
—28° F. This record was taken at an elevation of 
about nine thousand feet. It seems certain that the 
annual range of temperature in the heart of a continent 
will be much greater than that recorded on the coast at 
Cape Evans. “The annual range at the latter is about 
45° F. Perhaps we may therefore assume that the July 
temperature at the South Pole is about —60° F., which 
is much the same as that of the coldest place in Siberia 
(Verkhoyansk —59° F.). Probably the highest point 
on the Queen Maud Range (some six thousand feet 
higher) is the coldest place on our earth, as I indicated 
in my discussion of this problem in 1920 (see my Aus- 
tralian Meteorology, Figures 50 and 51). ‘These very 
cold temperatures are of course like those of the “‘iso- 
thermal layer’? (or tropopause) which lies some six 
miles above us in temperate lands. Above this height 
the drop in temperature of the outer atmosphere is only 
very gradual with increased height. 


GENERAL SOUTHERN CIRCULATION 


In the southern hemisphere it has long been known 
that the region is dominated essentially by two belts 
of low pressure and an intermediate belt of high pres- 
sure. Thus Hann records the average pressure near 
the equator at 757.9 mm. From here it increases as 
we move south to latitude 30° S., where it is a maxi- 
mum (for the world) of about 763.5 mm. Proceeding 
south again we find that by far the lowest average 
pressures occur about the Antarctic Circle, somewhere 


181 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


about 739.7 mm. It is also well known that these belts 


are to a considerable degree the tracks of moving 


eddies (cyclones and anticyclones) which in general 
move to the east round the earth at varying rates 
averaging perhaps four hundred miles a day. 


Trade Wind ~~: fs 
a i i 


Fic. 27,—ATMOSPHERIC CIRCULATION IN THE SOUTHERN 
HEMISPHERE SOUTH OF THE TRADE WIND BELT, ACCORDING 
TO THE “POLAR FRONT’ THEORY, SHOWING THE BELT 
OF Lows (L) SURROUNDING THE ANTARCTIC ANTI- 
CYCLONE (HH). 
(Slightly modified from E. Kidson.) 


It is when we consider the world circulation to the 
south of the Antarctic Circle that our data become 
sparse and rather difficult to interpret. In the older 
books it was assumed that the pressure fell off to a 
minimum near the South Pole. When the presence 


182 


CLIMATOLOGY 


of a huge icy plateau at the Pole was demonstrated, 
it seemed likely that this intensely cold region would 


N DJaF MAM J J AS ON DecJ Fo 


samy NURREDZA0R 
PBST 


Fic. 28. Pan ee MONTHLY TEMPERATURES AT CERTAIN 
AUSTRALIAN AND ANTARCTIC STATIONS. 


For comparison the mean monthly temperature in 78 deg. N. is 
also given. (Antarctic and Arctic values from Vol. I, pp. 84-85, 
of report of G. C. Simpson. From Geographical Review, 1928.) 


exhibit a fairly permanent high pressure control and 
this still seems to be the dominant control close to the 
polar surface. - But considerations of wind circulation 
in the upper air in Antarctica and of the precipitation 


183 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


TEMPERATURE IN 


Year Place Lat! fan; Feb: Mar.'| Ape.’ (Miax 
I9g11....| Cape Adare} 69 | +29 25 20 |+ 9 0 
iit. |\ Cape Evagsie77 te 2e4 te 3+ .7.|/— i ae 
Oru... | Rramheingty77o.) 145: 42) 6 | 17.5. eee 
1903.... | Snow Hill | 64 30 25 13 8 —2 


1904-7..|S. Orkney | 60 32.5 aq5 31.6 | 27.5 19.6 


of snowfall over the interior of the Plateau make it 
unlikely that this is a complete solution of the problem. 

Captain Kidson has applied the fruitful theory of 
Bjerknes to the question of Antarctic circulation, and 
he pictures these two belts of anticyclones (along 30° 5. 
latitude) and cyclones (along 60° S.) as developing 
along the margins of inflowing and outflowing cur- 
rents of air (see Figure 27). These latter maintain 
the interchange between cool dry air from the Pole 
and warm moist air from the equator, and the cyclones 
develop as eddies where the polar front moves along- 
side the tropical front. This whole series of eddies 
and currents probably is to be conceived as moving 
round the Pole en masse from west to east, while the 
winds composing the highs (or anticyclones) rotate 
counterclockwise about its center (and vice versa for 
the lows or cyclones). If his scheme is correct, there 
may be a real connection between the blizzard winds 
and the southeast trades. For (as I suggested in 1920) 
as regards direction and relation to dominant pressures, 
we might quite reasonably describe the characteristic 
“southeasters”’ of Antarctica as the “polar trade winds.” 

Summarizing the winds of the southern hemisphere, 


184 


CLIMATOLOGY 


THE ANTARCTIC 


Jane) } July Aug: > Sept. | Oct. Nov... Dee. Mean 
—16 |—15 —14 —2 {+2 +20 +28 +7 
—13.5|—21 —21 —16 |—3 +12 +22 re) 
—30 |—33.55 —48.5 —35.5|—11.5 +4 +20 —13.5 
eS ade aoe Oe ee: 13 17 29 

r=3 9.7 i152 19.2)" 25-1 29.4 30.6 | 24.1 


we find the southeast trades blowing fairly steadily 
about latitude 20°, along the northern side of the belt 
of rotating highs which move to the east in latitude 
35°. To the south of this belt is a region dominated 
by the Brave West Winds, which blow along the north- 
ern side of the series of Antarctic lows. The latter 
appear to move to the east along latitude 60°, but we 
have no accurate data, as few ships sail so far south. 
South again of this belt of cyclones or lows is the 
domain of the Antarctic southeasters, which are domi- 
nant all round the margin of the southern continent. 
This, indeed, has been demonstrated by studies of the 
movements of the pack ice. In Antarctica proper the 
winds are variable, the strong blizzards always blowing 
from the south or southeast but in places lighter north- 
erly winds are common. On the Great Plateau we have 
only records of a few summer journeys, but the snow 
ridges (sastrugi) give some clue to the dominant winds 
of the year. 


GENERAL CLIMATIC ELEMENTS 


It is not possible to give more than a brief discussion 
of the temperature, pressure, precipitation, and wind 


185 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


conditions. I shall confine my attention principally to 
the conditions on Ross Island, which have been ob- 
served longer than in any other place so far south as 
78° S. The temperature changes are shown graphically 
in the graphs in Figure 28, based mainly on G. C. Simp- 
son, where a record for 78° N. is added for comparison 
with 78° S. (of course with months changed as re- 
quired). It is seen that the southern locality is nearly 
20° F. colder in summer, autumn, and winter though 
in spring the temperatures are much closer. 

Temperatures varied very greatly within fairly short 
distances near Ross Island. Thus in the winter of 
1911 Wilson’s party on the Barrier on July 6th ex- 
perienced —76° F., while at Cape Evans it was 
—43° F., involving a difference of 33°. So also just 
before Scott died near One Ton Camp the temperature 
on March 8th was +2° F. at Cape Evans (latitude 
78°) and —33°F. at latitude 7912°. Yet later when 
Dr. Atkinson made a short journey on the Barrier on 
March 28th and 29th the temperature had risen to 
5 ween aoe + A. 

We may consider briefly the differences of summer 
temperature close to the North Pole and at the South 
Pole; again using Simpson’s data: 


Latitude | 88° North | June 28.6° F.| July 34.17 


Difference 55.2 59.3 


186 


CLIMATOLOGY 


So far as temperature is concerned, there is not much 
doubt as to which is the more comfortable region. As 
regards fall of temperature with height, the balloons 
sent up in 1911 show us that in summer the figure is 
about 6.8° C. per kilometer, which is much the same as 
in Europe and America. 

The rise in temperature consequent on a blizzard 
is well shown in the records of September 16th and 
17th, 1911. Before the blizzard the air was calm, the 
temperature —35° F. At 8 a.m. the sky began to 
cloud over and radiation was cut off, so that the tem- 
perature began to rise a little at once. It had risen to 
—15° F. before the blizzard began, when all the cold 
air was removed, and the air temperature jumped some 
20° to + 5° F. As the blizzard dropped the tempera- 
ture fell to —12° F. Such a fall is usual in these cases. 

The low summer temperatures recorded in Antarctica 
were at first very unexpected. If we neglect at- 
mospheric factors, we might expect the South Pole 
on December 22nd to be the hottest place on earth, 
for the earth is then nearest the sun, and solar radiation 
is focusing on to the Pole throughout the twenty-four 
hours. But Simpson points out that nearly all this 
energy is lost by direct reflection from the snow, and 
that the remainder is not sufficient to raise the tem- 
perature of the air to freezing point, before the sun 
reaches the solstice and the energy commences to de- 
crease. Moreover, there are no warm winds near the 
South Pole, which are a potent factor in warming the 
North Pole. 

187 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Framheim 7.8 Fig mai 9.8 6.5 8.9 


WIND IN THE ANTARCTIC 


Most Antarctic explorers return with an intense 
aversion to strong winds! It is not the low tempera- 
tures which matter, so much; for the writer has 
stripped to a vest when sledging at temperatures 30° 
below freezing, when there is no wind. But wind 
drives the cold air right against the skin, and any 
temperature below freezing soon becomes unpleasant 
under such circumstances. The preceding table shows 
the mean wind velocity during the four years 1902, 
1903, 1911, and 1912 at Cape Evans (or Hut Point) 
in miles per hour. (Amundsen’s base at Framheim is 
added below. ) 

These velocities varied greatly from year to year. 
Thus in June, 1911, we experienced an average of 31.8 
miles per hour throughout the month, or four times the 
velocity registered at Amundsen’s headquarters. This 
was the highest to date in the Antarctic, but was far 
below the records obtained by Mawson next year in 
Adelie Land, where his average for the year was fifty 
miles an hour or “gale force’ the whole time! We 
may quote from Mawson’s account of his experience 
in Adelie Land during July, 1913. 


The wind was frightful throughout the whole month of 
July, surpassing all previous records and wearing out our 


188 


CLIMATOLOGY 


July Aug. Sept. et, Nov. Dec. Mean 
17.1 16.8 14.5 14.3 13.5 10.4 14.8 
10.5 9.2 9.8 14.5 II.4 10.7 — 


much tried patience. On July 2 we noted “Thick as a 
wall outside with an eighty-five miler.” And so it com- 
menced and continued for a day, subsiding slowly through 
the seventies to the fifties; and then suddenly redoubling 
in strength rose to a climax about midnight on July 
fifth of one hundred and sixteen miles an hour. For eight 
hours it maintained an average of one hundred and seven 
miles an hour, and the hut seemed to be jarred and 
wrenched as the wind throbbed in its mightier gusts. 
These are probably the highest sustained velocities ever 
reported from a meteorological station. 


At Cape Evans almost all the surface winds (84.4 
per cent) came from the east or thereabouts, and about 
g per cent from near the north. The steam banner 
of Mount Erebus showed which way the winds were 
blowing at an elevation of about fifteen thousand feet, 
and here the chief winds were from the west. The 
cirrus drift was more or less equally divided from 
north, west, and east. 


Graham Land.—We owe to R. A. Mossman a discus- 
sion of the winds in this region, which may be sum- 
marized as follows. There appears to be a bar of high 
pressure over the region mentioned which acts as a 
“wind divide.” Hence the east is under the control of 
a Weddell Sea low, while the west is affected by a 

189 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Bellingshausen Sea low. On the Pacific side strong 
northeast winds prevail south of latitude 62° S., while 
farther to the west the “Belgica’’ seemed to find strong 
monsoonal winds, i.e. easterly in summer and westerly 
in winter. On the east side near Snow Hill, etc., the 
prevailing wind is southwest, while at the South 
Orkneys it is west-southwest. The observations during 
the drift of the “Endurance” and “Deutschland” in the 
Weddell Sea show that strong easterly and northeast- 
erly winds are met with, which prevail as far south 
as 78° S. in summer and early autumn. The west 
side of the Weddell Sea seems to exhibit southwest 
winds as if there were a cyclonic circulation in this 
area.” 


SNOWFALL 


No rain fell during our stay in the Antarctic, either 
at Cape Evans or at Cape Adare, but a rainbow was 
seen to the north-northeast of Cape Evans on February 
14th, 1911. No satisfactory method has yet been 
found of measuring the amount of snowfall, as it is 
usually accompanied by high wind. I have mentioned 
elsewhere that Taylor Valley seems to receive prac- 
tically no snowfall, and the change in environment as 
we proceed from this region to the vast ice carapace ex- 
tending into the sea all along the coast opposite 
Australia would lead us to suppose that the snowfall 
increases considerably to the north. The record of 
the snowfall on the Barrier (as deduced from a buried 


2 See the Geographical Journal (London), December, 1916. 
190 


CLIMATOLOGY 


depot) has already been referred to (see page 154). 
As regards snowfall in Adelie Land, the “Home of the 
Blizzard,’ Mawson describes his experiences in the 
following words: “. . . we led a strenuous existence 
at winter quarters buffeting with a sea of drifting 
snow which poured fluid-thick over the landscape. For 
months the drifting snow never ceased, and intervals of 
many days together passed when it was impossible to 
see one’s hand held at arm’s length. Such weather 
lasted almost nine months of the year.” 


ANTARCTIC CIRCULATION 


There is much to be learned about the local circula- 
tion on the continent, but several fairly well established 
facts stand out. In the first place there is no doubt 
that in the Ross Sea and the Weddell Sea and almost 
everywhere where ships have cruised along the coast 
for any lengthy period, the dominant winds are from 
the southeast. In the southern hemisphere this is pre- 
cisely the circulation required if we assume that an 
anticyclone covers most of Antarctica. Secondly, the 
upper winds are very different in direction. Thus the 
steam of Erebus (fifteen thousand feet) is blown 
chiefly from the west and southwest, while the upper 
clouds move from northwest or west. This is almost 
exactly the opposite of the surface winds at Cape 
Evans, which were from the east or southeast. So also 
Barkow (on Filchner’s expedition) sent up sounding 
balloons from Vahsel Bay (78° S.) and found east 
winds up to about twenty thousand feet, when the wind 
shifted sharply to south and southwest. This appears 


IQI 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


to show that the anticyclone is confined to the lower 
layers of the atmosphere. 

We have not much knowledge of winds on the 
plateau except in midsummer. On the longer journeys 
the dominant winds (and direction of snow ridges) 
were as follows: 


Date Locality Wind and Sastrugi 
Scott ....| 1903 | Above Taylor Glacier WSW. (near Horst) 
Shackleton | 1908 | Above Beardmore SOL 
David ....| 1908 | To Magnetic Pole West near Horst, SE. 
Scott ....| 1911 |To South Pole SSE. to SSW, 
Bage .....| 1912 |To Magnetic Pole SE. 
Mawson .. | 1912 |Queen Mary Land SE: 
Filchner .. | 1916 | Southeast of Weddell Sea|F. 


The writer from his experience of many weeks spent 
in the valleys of the great outlet glaciers is sure that 
the winds in these deep troughs (often four thousand 
feet deep) have little relation to the true circulation. 
They are almost entirely controlled by the topography 
and blow up or down the valley, usually the latter. So 
also the winds in the three permanent stations of Cape 
Armitage (1902-4), Cape Royds (1908), and Cape 
Evans (1gII-I2) are largely determined by the 
gigantic walls of Erebus (thirteen thousand feet) on 
the east and the Lister scarp (ten to twelve thousand 
feet) on the west. It is not safe to draw deductions 
as to the general circulation without taking this 
topographic factor into account. The writer remem- 
bers a journey of only half a dozen miles on the seven- 
teenth of April, 1911, from Cape Evans to Glacier 

192 


CLIMATOLOGY 


Tongue. There was a north wind at Cape Evans, a 
west wind off the sound halfway, and a little later we 
found a strong southeaster driving snow over the root 
of Glacier Tongue. These were local winds which did 
not indicate the onset of a biizzard. 

Another phenomenon to be noted is the increase in 
temperature as a blizzard approaches from the south- 
east. The intensely cold and stagnant air of the coastal 
margin is soon swept away by the blizzard, and the 
temperature usually rises. This rise in temperature is 
of the same kind as is found in foehn winds, and is 
due to adiabatic heating, the air generally being com- 
pressed by descent from the plateau. We must also 
take note of the rapidity with which a furious blizzard 
develops from what has often been practically calm 
weather. Accurate data on these points are given in 
Simpson’s large memoir. (See also p. 79.) 

There have been several attempts to weld these facts 
into a harmonious whole. We may briefly consider 
those of Meinardus, Hobbs, and Simpson. Meinardus 
based his report of 1911 on Drygalski’s data. He was 
chiefly struck with the fact that there must be a large 
supply of snow in the interior of the plateau to main- 
tain the ice cap, and the constant drain due to the bergs 
breaking off all round the margin. He therefore be- 
lieves that the fundamental feature on the plateau is 
a cyclone which occupies the region above seven or 
eight thousand feet, and which is fed by constant 
westerly winds at that level. He states that in anti- 
cyclones the air flows in at the center in the upper 
layers, descends, becomes relatively dry and, as it 


193 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


streams out on the surface, removes moisture from the 
central region. 

W. H. Hobbs lays great stress on the domelike shape 
of the ice cap (see Figure 29), which is some ten 
thousand feet near the Pole, and thence descends fairly 
slowly and then more steeply to sea level in Mawson’s 
region (66° S.). The plateau is about eight thousand 


Fic. 29.—THE GLACIAL ANTICYCLONE (IN SECTION). 
(After W. H. Hobbs.) 


feet at latitude 77° and seven thousand feet at lati- 
tude 73°. He states his case somewhat as follows: 


If there were no extensive high and snow-covered areas 
in the Antarctic it is clear that the circulation would be less 
vigorous. When the slope is very gentle air drainage is 
necessarily sluggish, and such regions (when there are no 
higher surrounding mountains) can and do establish (1) a 
circulation of the upper air from the ocean to the higher 
portions of the plateau; (2) a well defined increase of 
temperature for the first few hundred meters of elevation ; 
(3) a slow settling of the air onto the cold surface below ; 
(4) the precipitation, without cloud, of fine snow crystals 


194 


CLIMATOLOGY 


(frost snow); (5) drainage of this chilled and relatively 
dense air to lower levels; (6) drifting of the snow with 
the winds, and the consequent extension so far as tempera- 
ture and other conditions will permit of the ice-covered 
area.® 


Hobbs believes that sufficient snow supply is obtained 
in the interior of the plateau from ice crystals in the 
cirrus clouds which descend in the interior of the anti- 
cyclone and are first melted and then vaporized by the 
adiabatic elevation of the temperature. The snowfall 
resulting from these cirrus crystals in Hobbs’ opinion 
consists of those minute spicules and plates described 
by sledgers near the Pole, which differ greatly from 
the snowfall near sea level. (The present writer would 
expect to find the cirrus layer at the Pole considerably | 
lower than the five miles indicated in Hobbs’ figures. ) 

G. C. Simpson in 1923 offered another solution which 
in part combines the theories of Meinardus and Hobbs. 
He writes : 


Over the snow-covered surface of the Antarctic, whether 
at sea level or at the height of the plateau, radiation is so 
strong that the air is abnormally cooled, especially in the 
layers immediately above the surface. This cooled air is 
heavier than the surrounding air, and therefore the pres- 
sure increases from the exterior to the interior of the polar 
area; in other words the pressure distribution is anti- 
cyclonic and the air movement in general outwards. Above 
each anticyclone a cyclone forms on account of the rela- 


3 Quoted by Hobbs, Glacial Anticyclones (New York, Mac- 
millan, 1926), p. 182, as a good summary of his theory by 
Humphreys. 


195 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


tively rapid vertical pressure change caused by the cold 
dense air. The descending air is warmed giving clear 
cloudless skies . . . as one penetrates the Antarctic. (See 
Figure 30.) 

The clear skies in their turn facilitate radiation, as does 
the small absolute humidity of the air. In consequence 
the air and the snow surface become abnormally cold and 
there is a great tendency to the formation of temperature 


PROBABLE [SQ8ARS AT 5000 ™. 


Fic. 30.—PROBABLE ISOBARS AT SEA LEVEL (RIGHT) AND 
AT 3,000 METERS (LEFT). 


Broken lines A, B, C, D show successive positions of pressure 
waves. (After G. C. Simpson.) 


inversion, especially in the lower atmosphere. On these 
normal fine weather conditions are superposed a series of 
pressure waves which travel more or less radially out- 
wards from the center of the continent. These waves 
alter the surface pressure conditions, and cause air motion 
which is frequently accompanied by forced ascending cur- 
rents. The abnormally cold surface air is forced upwards 
in these currents, rapidly cooled in the ascent, and the 
water contained is precipitated as snow, which when com- 


196 


CLIMALOLOGY 


bined with the high surface winds produces the typical 
Antarctic blizzard. 


Hence Simpson follows Meinardus as regards the 
method of precipitation from an upper cyclone. But 
he raises the “snow-supplying cyclone” more than three 
thousand meters above the plateau so that it does not 
show in the figure. He thinks that the plateau itself 
is everywhere controlled by a shallow surface anti- 
cyclone, but his map omits this as its position is in- 
definite. 

Some attention may now be given to these Antarctic 
pressure waves on which Simpson lays great stress. 
It is found that local variations in pressure in this 
region are usually not accompanied by changes of wind 
direction, as in lower latitudes. A series of these 
waves moves across the Ross Sea area, first affecting 
the Southern Plateau and Framheim (see Figure 30), 
and then moving to the northwest and reaching Ross 
Island and lastly Cape Adare. The mean length (time 
of passage) of such a barometric wave is one hundred 
and fifty hours, and the mean variation amounts to 
0.572 inch. These waves apparently have a velocity 
of about forty miles an hour. They seem to affect 
much of Antarctica, but have not been detected in 
New Zealand. 

The usual pressure conditions near Ross Island con- 
sist of a more or less permanent low over the warm 
Ross Sea, and a permanent high over the cold Plateau. 
Thus the normal winds would be southerly or south- 
east winds. Simpson believes that the pressure waves 


197 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


modify the usual pressure conditions. When they in- 
tensify these normal conditions a furious blizzard re- 
sults; when they counteract them calms or northerly 
winds result at Cape Evans. 


AURORA AUSTRALIS 


Throughout the winter we maintained an aurora 
watch primarily with a view to determining their re- 
lation to magnetic or meteorological phenomena. The 
first observation was made on April 2nd, Ig11, by 
Captain Scott. He noted that it extended to within 
10° of the zenith from the south. It was of a reddish 
hue and took the form of a curtain with two folds. On 
the 28th of April I was on watch and saw an elaborate 
display about 9:10 p.m. It affected the whole sky to 
the east (behind Erebus). At first isolated grayish 
streamers reached over 8°; they had a reddish tinge, 
but were not bright enough to show the “auroral line” 
in the spectroscope. The whole brightened until it be- 
came a continuous band of yellowish light. It con- 
centrated with a movement to the north, reminding one 
of a caterpillar’s motion as the more vivid mass of 
light undulated towards Erebus. At one moment it 
clotted into a globule of light not unlike a meteor, 
pointing to the crater, with a streamer extending up 
and slightly to the south. During the maximum the 
streamers were over 20° from the horizon. Dr. Wil- 
son saw traces of orange and purple in the borders. 
The display lasted six minutes. | 

Mawson records that at Cape Royds in 1908 they 
saw auroras from March 26th to October 4th. They 

198 


CEIMATOLOGY 


seemed to be more abundant after 7:30 P.m., and had 
little color except the usual yellowish green. Arches, 
curtains, and searchlights are the chief shapes. He 
noted that the display often began to the north, passed 
east behind Erebus and drifted to the south. They 
thus kept away from the Magnetic Pole, which lay 
to the northwest. No very definite results could be 
expected with regard to their relation with magnetic 
storms, for the aurora watch was spoiled by frequent 
blizzards and was never really continuous. However, 
Dr. Chree found that in 1911 41 per cent of the most 
striking aurora were associated with very marked mag- 
netic disturbances. Ponting was unable to photograph 
the auroras and we are not clear as to their origin. 
Arrhenius believes that negatively-charged particles are 
driven through the sun’s atmosphere by light-repulsion 
and reach the earth’s atmosphere, thus forming auroras. 


CHAPTER X 
FLORA AND FAUNA 


FLORA 


N discussing the flora of Antarctica one is ir- 

resistibly reminded of the famous essay on “The 
Snakes of Ireland.” It is comprised in the sentence. 
“There are no snakes in Ireland.” So also one may 
almost dismiss the land flora of the continent in the 
sentence, ‘There are no flowering plants in Antarctica.” 
Still as there are over a hundred lichens and many 
species of mosses and algz, some little description of 
these will be of interest. I believe that I discovered 
the largest vegetated region so far seen on the Ant- 
arctic mainland, and I am under the impression that 
I found the largest living land animals. Possibly the 
reader will not be much impressed by these records 
when he hears the particulars! 

On my first day’s sledging in the Antarctic (January 
28th, 1911) on our journey up the Ferrar Glacier, I 
made a detour to examine the slopes at the foot of the 
valley wall near the Herbertson Glacier. On the 
gravels some dozen or so feet above the surface of the 
Ferrar Glacier, I was amazed to see a carpet of green 
moss, as flourishing as any in more temperate regions. 
I sat down on a granite erratic and noted that there 
were three different species present, but as I was not 

200 


FLORA AND FAUNA 


aware how rare was such an occurrence at 78° S., I 
regret to say that I did not collect specimens. One 
species was sessile and tufted, another resembled the 
alga Ulva, while a third was markedly fibrous. This 
patch of green was sixty feet long and about fifteen 
feet wide, and owed its existence to its sheltered snow- 
free position facing the midday sun. 

On our second summer’s sledging we came upon 
another relatively heavily vegetated region in Ant- 
arctica. This was at our permanent camp at Cape 
Geology on the southwest side of Granite Harbor. 
Here amid the bowlders and groins of granite were 
“chunks” of dormant moss, which, however, showed 
practically no sign of growth that season. We found 
frondose lichens also clustered on the rocks at the base 
of Discovery Bluff nearby. The botanical specimens 
which we collected here led us to name the adjacent 
shores “Botany Bay,’ and we found the moss abundant 
enough to fill the crevices in the stone hut which we 
built at the camp. Elsewhere I noted very small patches 
of lichen now and again, but nowhere else did I come 
across any abundant growth even of moss or lichen 
in the several hundred miles of rocky coast which we 
explored. 

However, in the warmer regions of West Antarctica 
there are more numerous examples of the vegetable 
kingdom. There are actually two flowering plants 
found in the northern part of the islands of Graham 
Land. One of these is a grass called Deschampsia 
antarctica and the other is Colobanthus crassifolius, 
allied to the pinks and campions. It is worth while 

201 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


to contrast the flora of the northern point of Green- 
land (in latitude 83° N.) with this very poor repre- 
sentation in 65° S. This is how Peary describes his 
first view of Academy Land in July, 1891. 


It was almost impossible to believe that we were stand- 
ing upon the northern shore of Greenland, with the most 
brilliant sunshine all about us, with yellow poppies grow- 
ing between the rocks, and a herd of musk oxen in the 
valley behind us. Down in that valley I had found an old 
friend, a dandelion in bloom, and had seen the bullet-like 
flight and heard the energetic buzz of the bumble bee. 


Or compare with the southern continent Rasmus- 
sen’s account of the same region witk its fifty flower- 
ing plants. “Thick well developed grass grew in many 
places . . . everywhere sturdy Arctic willow, poppy, 
saxifrage and Cassiope.”’ As a result there is a per- 
manent Arctic fauna including musk oxen, lemming 
and hares. 

The typical form of Antarctic flora is, however, the 
lichen and of these nine specimens were collected by 
Hooker in 1843 at Cockburn Island (64° S.) near 
Snow Hill. For fifty years this was the only list of 
lichens from the continent. These genera are Par- 
melia, Physcia, Lecanora, Pertusaria, Verrucaria, and 
Collema. Of these Physcia and Lecanora have since 
been recorded from Victoria Land. Just over one 
hundred Antarctic species were known when Darbishire 
published his lengthy report in 1911. Of these Borch- 
grevinck collected two, Gerlache fifty-one, Bruce six, 
Charcot six, Scott (in 1904) twelve, and Nordenskjold 

202 


FLORA AND FAUNA 


eighteen. No less than sixty-seven of these are en- 
demic in Antarctica. It is interesting to note that 
while thirty-two are also found in South America, no 
less than twenty-five also occur in far-away New Zea- 
land. Furthermore, practically half the Antarctic 
lichens are common also to the Arctic flora. Darbi- 
shire’s list shows the following as important genera in 
Antarctica in addition to those specified above; Lecidea, 
Rhizocarpon, Gyrophora, Cladonia, Placodium, Buellia, 
and Acorospora. Lecanora has twice as many species 
as any other. 


FAUNA 


It is clear from the preceding description of the land 
flora that there is no food available for higher animals 
on the Antarctic mainland, and I do not propose to 
discuss the flora and fauna of the sub-Antarctic islands 
in this necessarily brief account. But the seas teem 
with life, at any rate in the summer. [I shall never 
forget our first sight of a penguin rookery at Cape 
Crozier on New Year’s Day, 1911. The sea was per- 
fectly full of the birds cruising about in search of 
shrimps (Euphausia, etc.) for food. I have never 
seen seas so teeming with life. The explanation is 
that these polar waters are free from bacteria which 
break up protoplasm and so render it to some extent 
useless for food. The cold waters act as a kind of 
cold storage, and supply unlimited food material for 
higher organisms in the form of diatoms, alge, and 
protozoa which quickly vanish after death in warmer 
regions. At the other end of the scale of life in the 

203 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Antarctic are the warm-blooded killer-whales (Orca), 
of which we saw a party of three busy gobbling up 
penguins. I was greatly struck with this “‘proto- 
plasmic cycle’ as it may be termed, and indeed on 
several occasions the explorers themselves were at- 
tacked by the killer-whales and nearly took a part in 
the cycle also. The presence of the following rhyme 
may perhaps be excused in view of the very real biolog- 
ical concept which is illustrated therein! (Figure 31.) 

I propose to confine my attention primarily to the 
whales and seals in marine biology, and to the birds on 
land. All of these animals are, however, only so- 
journers on the Antarctic shores. None is a true 
dweller in the Antarctic and none ever ventures inland, 
except perhaps an aged seal to die. 

I have based my account of the fauna chiefly upon 
notes taken verbatim from Dr. Wilson, my colleague 
in the Antarctic, or from his writings. There are two 
main classes of whales, divided according to whether 
they are toothed, or provided with baleen (whalebone). 
To the former class belong the sperm or cachalot 
(Physeter), the bottlenose, the killer, and porpoise. 
To the latter the giant rorqual (Balaenoptera), the 
right whale (Balena), and the humpback (Megap- 
tera). Of the whales the most prominent off the 
Antarctic coast is the large carnivorous dolphin, the 
killer-whale or Orca gladiator. It is usually about 
fifteen feet long and hunts generally in packs of a 
dozen or more. In a northern specimen, which was 
twenty-one feet long, the remains of thirteen seals and 
thirteen porpoises were found in a more or less digested 

204 


And off Ue y elle dititems 
cold nif do With Cyn 
“torty amillron shimplets feed atoon, 
As (attet> 
Ana te shiieps make Ore penguins 
andthe Seals And whales aL 
alien 


Along comes the Orca 
s Bax kis en dewntelow, 


“while wp ebove IRe Afterguard 
attack fhem on the face 
A bold enploYer fumbles deum sy, 
and slaves the mus hy pack in; 
He's cYom pled up betm ean Uke fP&es 
And so at Hear whack” in. 
And there's no dovbt Re Soen become 3 
. a paket filiset- 
Iqvigoracting diatoms ; although 
hey*re none. He Wisery 


So th prefeplasm pa Sses Onis cy 
hever- ceasing rovnd, 
Like abhvuge resting decz 
mal 7 te Which fnoeng 
1s foond 


Fic. 3I1.—THE BIOLOGICAL CYCLE IN THE ANTARCTIC. 


The diatom Corethron and Euphausia appear in front of the 
procession, but not to scale. Then follow penguin, seal and killer- 
whale. The Afterguard were the officers. (By permission of 
John Murray.) 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


state. Fourteen was apparently its unlucky number, for 
the animal appeared to have been choked in an endeavor 
to swallow another seal. They are a constant menace 
to the penguins and seals, especially in the pack ice or 
bay ice, and many of the crab-eater seals are marked 
with terrible scars as the result of the Orcas’ attacks. 

Undoubtedly they attempt to shake the seals off 
the floes into the sea, and on several occasions men 
in our expedition were attacked in the same way. For 
instance, early in January, I9II, just as we were un- 
loading the ship eight killer-whales attempted to cap- 
ture some of our dogs who were loose on the ice. 
Ponting was taking photographs of the killers, and 
ventured too near them in his enthusiasm. He nar- 
rates that they lifted their wicked heads above water 
to look at him, and he was just pressing the button 
when he felt as if an earthquake had hit him. The 
whole floe was being broken away, and he was drifting 
from the firm ice. He lost some valuable equipment, 
and did not stop for the photo! A similar incident, 
but luckily not so exciting, happened to me in the bay 
ice off the Ferrar Glacier; the men rescuing the ponies 
who were adrift on the floe on March Ist near the 
Barrier were closely surrounded by eighteen of these 
predatory brutes. 

Two other dolphins are not uncommon on the edges 
of the pack ice. One of these is called the Dusky 
Dolphin from its dark brown back; while the other 
has a white hourglass on its side, but has not yet been 
properly investigated. 

Of the real whales, the rorqual is fairly common, 

206 


FLORA AND FAUNA 


especially near the Balleny Islands. It is the largest 
mammal and sometimes occurs nearly one hundred feet 
long. It is characterized by a broad blue slate-colored 
back with a small dorsal fin. Its spout rises twelve or 
fifteen feet into the air. On our return in March, 
1912, we sighted a school of eight sperm whales, but 
we were then in New Zealand waters. The humpback 
whale is said to reach a length of sixty feet. It earns 
its name from the low dorsal fin. The back is black, 
the belly yellowish, and the flippers white. There are 
two other finner whales to be met with in the Ross 
Sea. One is round-backed, black, solitary, and twenty 
feet long. It has a very small hooklike dorsal fin. 
The other is gregarious and has an enormous dorsal 
fin two or three feet long. It is black above and lighter 
beneath. I shall refer further to these mammals in 
the following chapter. 


Seals —There are five species of seals to be seen 
fairly often in or near East Antarctica; of these three 
commonly occur south of the Antarctic Circle. The 
huge sea elephant (Macrorhinus) is very abundant at 
Macquarie Island (latitude 54° S.) but only one or two 
specimens have ever been known to wander down to 
the Antarctic. The sea leopard (Stenorhyncus) is a 
solitary animal and is not uncommon at Cape Adare, 
though I only saw one specimen as far south as Ross 
Island (78° S.). The sea leopard is about twelve feet 
long and has almost a snakelike appearance owing to its 
slender shape, which enables it to swim remarkably 
quickly. Its diet consists of fish, penguins, and even 

207 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


small seals. Its color is dark gray with a black back, 
sometimes somewhat tawny beneath. The teeth differ 
greatly from those of the relatively harmless Weddell 
seal. In the sea leopard the canines are very sharp, 
while the twenty post-canines are three-lobed tridents, 
adapted to catch and tear fish to pieces. Its only enemy 
is the killer-whale. 

The common seal of the pack ice is the crab-eater 
(Lobodon) which is often so light-colored as to be 
practically white. Usually, however, there are many 
individuals of a chocolate color with handsome dap- 
plings. It is smaller than the other common Antarctic 
species (the Weddell) being about eight feet long. It 
lives almost entirely upon shrimps which it grubs off 
the bottom of the sea together with much gravel. The 
teeth are curiously divided, and apparently act like the 
whale’s baleen, for the seal squirts out all the water 
through the teeth, which act as a sieve, while it retains 
the shrimps and stones. Apparently the latter help to 
grind its food. This seal is usually observed in little 
groups of five or six lying on the floes, so that it is 
the first seal to be seen by the explorer. 

The Ross seal (Ommatophoca) is the smallest of all, 
being only about seven feet long. It is very rare in 
East Antarctica but is apparently commoner in West 
Antarctica. The Weddell seal (Leptonychotes) is the 
most important of the shore fauna, for it is an invalu- 
able source of food, fuel, and hides to the explorer. 
Luckily its fur is not attractive to the sealers, for it is 
long and coarse with no thick under-fur such as is 
found on the true fur-seals. We used several skins 

208 


FLORA AND FAUNA 


as a roof for our granite hut at Cape Geology, and the 
fur reminded me of that of an ordinary cow. In this 
position on the roof the hide was comparatively trans- 
lucent in spite of the covering of fur. The Weddell 
seal is sluggish and collects in large herds. In October 
and November especially one may see many hundred 
seals congregated in favorable places along the tide- 
cracks and shear-cracks in MacMurdo Sound. 

The Weddell seal is not so frequently attacked by the 
killer-whale as its cousin, the crab-eater, which lives 
out on the open pack ice. Like all these animals and 
birds, it seems quite devoid of fear when on land. At 
the Cape Roberts rendezvous in January, I912, we 
were rather short of food and there were three seals 
basking on the ice off the cape. I killed one the first 
week, the other two, who were only a yard or two away, 
taking little interest in the gory business. Next week I 
killed the second seal, and in the third and last week 
of our enforced wait I killed the third, so that if we 
could not cross the crevasses of the Wilson Piedmont 
Glacier and had to return, we might find some food 
available for the next week or so. 

The Weddell seal is sometimes ten feet long, and 
has a brownish coat richly marked with black and gray 
and silvery white. The young are born during the 
last week of October and the beginning of November. 
At birth they have a thick and woolly coat of dull 
ochre, gray and black, which drops off after a fortnight 
or so. The teeth are sharp and curved to enable it to 
catch fish and are also used to open holes in the sea- 
ice. Before I went south I used to wonder how a seal 

| 209 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


could cut a hole through six feet of winter ice in order 
to breathe. I don’t believe they ever cut through the 
ice, but I have watched a seal laboriously enlarging a 
natural hole in a tide-crack or shear-crack, so as to 
make it large enough for an outlet. It opens its jaws 
to the widest, and uses the teeth as a sort of rasp on 
the edges of the hole. After many hours of this un- 
pleasant work, no doubt it files away some inches from 
all round an accidental hole, and so is able to shoot 
out on to the sea-ice. 

Some twenty miles up the Koettlitz Glacier, we were 
surprised to find many seals, and came to the conclusion 
that they swam up the subglacial stream, which I 
named the Alph River. On one occasion I prodded 
one of these seals with my ice ax. After some sneezes 
and grumbles, he proceeded to sing to me. He lay 
over on his side and produced a whole octave of mu- 
sical notes from his chest, ranging up to a canarylike 
chirrup. Later I found that Dr. Wilson and Dr. 
Racovitzi had already recorded the musical ability of 
Antarctic seals. When the seal approaches the end of 
life, it seems to wander from the sea. At any rate 
we came on a number of carcasses several thousand 
feet up the Ferrar Glacier, and nearly twenty miles 
from the sea. Even in the Dry Valley of Taylor 
Glacier we found desiccated carcasses on the ground 
moraine. Presumably they had crawled up the valley 
over a carpet of snow or ice which had disappeared 
when we first traversed it in IQIT. 

Birds.—Wilson records twelve species of birds seen 
in East Antarctica, but only three went as far south as 

210 


FLORA AND FAUNA 


our winter quarters. A little north of the pack the 
Fulmar petrel and Antarctic petrel were fairly abun- 
dant. In the northern waters of the Ross Sea we saw 
a few giant petrels, snow petrels, and Wilson’s stormy 
petrels. On Ross Island the only flying bird was the 
McCormick skua (Megalestris) which lived on fish 
when there were no penguin eggs or chicks to devour. 
The old name of Cape Evans was “The Skuary” and 
so these gulls were very common round our hut. It is 
a large brown bird with a white patch on each wing. 
It breeds all along South Victoria Land in hollows in 
the rocks. Practically no nest is built, though I no- 
ticed at Cape Geology a few feathers or moss in some 
of the “nests.”” Two eggs are laid early in December, 
which are brownish with darker splashes of color, but 
only one chick is reared. On Cape Roberts early in 
January, 1912, we observed three nests of these gulls. 
Two of the pairs of birds were disturbed by our 
proximity, and simplified their home life by eating up 
their own or each other’s eggs. The third pair aban- 
doned their dark little chicken, which we attempted to 
feed, regretting the destruction we had caused. The 
sledge poet recorded his end, as follows: 


So little Blackie reigned supreme, 
Until one day when he was fed 
(By that kind and humane leader 
Foster father, foster feeder ) 
On rich and tasty lumps of blubber. 
His little tummy stretched like rubber, 
Stretched too much— 
and now he’s dead! 
Pi i | 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Penguins.—There are many species of penguins but 
they are all restricted to the southern hemisphere. Even 
the fossil forms do not occur north of the equator. 
As we have seen (p. 105) several fossil penguins have 
been discovered near Graham Land, while there are 
others from Patagonia and New Zealand. It seems 
likely that the penguins separated off from other birds 
early in their history. There is no doubt that originally 
the penguin used the wing for flight, though now it 
has degenerated to a flipper. It is quaint to see the 
penguin still tuck its beak under the flipper, an ancient 
habit apparently, for it cannot gain much warmth 
therefrom. Wilson states that the feather tracts are 
distributed like a lizard’s scales and the arrangement 
is in no way as advanced as that of a domestic fowl. 
The largest penguin, the Emperor, has primitive leg 
bones in which the three parallel shank bones are still 
distinct, though in all other birds they are fused. 

Of the seven or eight common penguins, only two 
occur in the Antarctic. These are the emperor and 
Adelie penguins. The emperor penguin (Aptenodytes 
forsteri) is surely the most unusual of all living birds. 
Some of his primitive characteristics have been men- 
tioned, but his breeding habits are unique. No other 
bird and surely few other forms of life choose the 
middle of the fiercest winter on earth for their breed- 
ing season! Only two regions are known where this 
penguin lays its eggs. The first was discovered at 
Cape Crozier in 1902, and the second in Queen Mary 
Land in 1912. Ina small bight, just where the edge 
of the great Ross Barrier ice touches the cliffs of 

212 


FLORA AND FAUNA 


Ross Island, there is a patch of sea-ice which remains 
in all through the winter. Here the emperor penguin 
passes the cold dark months, and it was to obtain eggs 
in an early stage of incubation that the “worst journey 
in the world” (see p. 55) was undertaken. Dr. Wilson 
found one hundred birds here, incubating their eggs, 


in July, 1911, and he was able to obtain three eggs, 


Fic. 32.—EMPEROR PENGUIN AND CHICK; ALSO ADELIE 
PENGUINS PONDERING, ECSTATIC AND TOBOGGANING. 


Winter and summer scenes are conjoined here. 


each containing an embryo. In July the temperature 
at times falls to —76° F., or 108° below freezing. 
Earlier, in 1903, Wilson had discovered that by Sep- 
tember all the eggs were hatched and there were only 
a few living chickens. These were perched on the 
parents’ feet and were protected by a curious feathered 
fold or lappet which hangs down from the parents’ 
breast. When the chick is hungry or inquisitive, it 
pokes out from under the lappet a piebald downy head, 
B13 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


emitting its shrill and persistent pipe until the parent 
fills it up! Wilson’s account of the life of a penguin 
chick cannot be improved upon. 


I think the chickens hate their parents, and when one 
watches the proceedings in a rookery it strikes one as not 
surprising. In the first place there is about one chick to 
ten or twelve adults and each adult has an overpowering 
desire to ‘‘sit” on something. Both males and females 
want to nurse, and the result is that when a chicken finds 
himself alone there is a rush on the part of a dozen unem- 
ployed to seize him. Naturally he runs away and dodges 
here and there until a six-stone emperor falls on him, and 
then begins a regular football scrimmage in which each 
tries to hustle the other off, and the end is too often dis- 
astrous to the chick. Sometimes he falls into a crack in 
the ice, and stays there to be frozen while the parents 
squabble at the top; sometimes rather than be nursed I 
have seen him crawl in under an ice-ledge and remain 
there where the old ones could not reach him. I think it 
is not an exaggeration to say that of the 77 per cent that 
die, no less than half are killed by kindness. 


The young bird moves out to the breaking floe and 
soon floats out to sea. His first feather plumage ap- 
pears in January when he is five months old. Then 
the silver gray changes to blue gray with a white front. 
A year later a second moult occurs and then the orange 
patch appears on the neck, and the head and throat turn 
black. His food consists of fish which he catches 
readily in his sharp beak. In the water these quaint 
birds swim like Plesiosaurs, or at any rate not like 

214 


FLORA AND FAUNA 


other birds, with the body submerged and the long 
snakelike heads projecting above the surface. The 
birds stand nearly four feet high, and as they waddle 
along erect on their feet like a man, it was a matter of 
common occurrence to mistake them in the polar twi- 
light for fellow explorers! 


Adelie Penguins.—Of all birds the penguin is best 
adapted to aquatic life. It swims entirely under water 
by means of its wings, which have modified to form 
veritable flippers. To breathe it jumps out of the water 
in the fashion rendered familiar to voyagers by the 
dolphins. The Adelie runs along upright and reminded 
me of a tiny child learning to walk, who runs quickly 
to his mother, knowing that a topple at the end does 
not matter. Then he will stop and flap his wings 
(one was going to say arms) and bow and turn his 
head around in a most human and unbirdlike way. 
The most striking feature, I think, is the stiff little tail 
which he drags on the ground as he toddles along, and 
which seems to help to support him. Possibly the scien- 
tific name (Pygo-scelis, tail-leg) refers to this habit. 
The bird stands about two feet five inches in height. 
The coloring of pure white breast and black back 
reminds one of a stout little man in a swallowtail coat 
and a white shirt, both much too big for him. 

The most complete study has been made by Dr. 
Levick at Cape Adare (71° 14’ S.) during 1911. Dur- 
ing the winter the birds probably live on the northern 
edge of the pack ice, some five hundred miles north 
of their rookery on land. The first penguins arrived 

215 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


on October 13th, and on the seventeenth there was a 
thin sprinkling scattered all over the rookery. They 
were tired and rested on the old nests, but on October 
18th a few started to build. The male birds collected 
the stones, while the females mounted guard over the 
construction. As the later birds arrived some of them 
climbed one thousand feet up Cape Adare to make 
their nests. By October 29th the migration had ceased. 
The mating is accompanied by a definite “proposal” 
to the hen, the “ring’’ taking the form of a pebble. 
When two birds have agreed to pair they assume the 
“ecstatic” attitude, raising their beaks vertically and 
rocking from side to side. Rival cocks fight viciously, 
breast to breast, hitting each other rapidly with their 
flippers until one is exhausted. (See Figure 32.) 

On November 3rd several eggs were found and up 
to this time no bird had eaten any food since arrival. 
They eat snow readily, however. Many starved for 
twenty-seven days in spite of all the fighting and hard 
work involved in collecting stones. The second egg 
is laid about three days later and incubation lasts about 
thirty-five days. After the eggs are laid the birds take 
turns to go down and feed on shrimps (Euphausia). 
They swim either entirely below water, or occasionally 
with their heads alone projecting. They are expert 
divers and Levick records their “upward dives’ on to 
ledges five feet above the water. The sea leopard is 
their deadly enemy and in the stomach of one specimen 
no less than eighteen penguins were found in various 
stages of digestion. The young chicks feed by pushing 
the head inside the parents’ throat and so helping itself 

216 


FLORA AND FAUNA 


direct from the gullet. The growth is rapid, for it 
weighs about three ounces when hatched, twenty-five 
ounces in eight days, and forty-two ounces in twelve 
days. The big chicks are herded in a clump and 
guarded by a few old birds, while all the rest go out 
collecting shrimps to feed the clump. The young learn 
to swim as soon as their plumage is acquired, and then 
the old birds give up feeding them. On March 12th all 
had left Cape Adare for their winter quarters on the 
ice pack. 

Cherry-Garrard has given us a pen picture of sur- 
vival among the Adelie penguins. I quote a paragraph. 


The life of the Adelie penguin is one of the most un- 
christian and successful in the world. The penguin which 
went in for being a true believer would never stand the 
ghost of a chance. Watch them go to bathe. Some fifty 
or sixty agitated birds are gathered upon the ice-foot, 
peering over the edge, telling one another how nice it 
will be, and what a good dinner they are going to have. 
But this is all swank; they are really worried by a horrid 
suspicion that a sea leopard is waiting to eat the first to 
dive. The really noble bird according to our theories 
would say, “I will go first and if I am killed I shall at any 
rate have died unselfishly, sacrificing my life for my com- 
panions,” and in time all the most noble birds would be 
dead. What they really do is to try and persuade a com- 
panion of weaker mind to plunge; failing this they hastily 
pass a conscription act and push him over. And then— 
bang, helter-skelter in go all the rest. 


217 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Microscopic LIFE 


Some interesting notes on the inhabitants of the 
lakes in Cape Royds have been recorded by James 
Murray. Orange colored algz were found to carry 
myriads of living things. Creeping rotifers were the 
most numerous, while water bears and mites were often 
observed. The stones of Coast Lake were often cov- 
ered by bright red patches, as though they had been 
sprinkled by blood, and these patches consisted of 
tightly packed rotifers. Experiments showed that 
temperatures of —4o0° F. did not kill these animals. 
Drying, freezing, thawing, moistening them or leaving 
them in brine seemed to have no effect on them. It is 
noteworthy that the adult forms, not the eggs, were 
tested, and some of them lived until after their arrival 
in London. The rotifers are minute worms, while the 
water bears are allied to the insects. Of the former 
Hydatina, Adineta and Philodina are common genera. 
Of the water bears Macrobiotus arcticus is common. It 
was previously only known from the Spitzbergen re- 
gion. It is to be noted that some of these rotifers were 
found below fifteen feet of ice on Blue Lake. This ice 
did not melt during the expedition’s stay at Cape 
Royds, so that the rotifers well understand how to sus- 
pend animation. 

When we started on our second summer’s sledging, 
Dr. Wilson asked us to keep a lookout for insects liv- 
ing in the moss which we might come across on our 
journey. Previously only fragments of various 
“spring-tails” had been discovered among moss ob- 

218 


FLORA AND FAUNA 


tained in 1903. One evening at the end of November, 
1911, I noticed some dark specks floating on a little 
rocky pool at Cape Geology in Granite Harbor. With 
no organic matter in the air this seemed unusual and 
on closer examination I found that these were the long- 
desired insects. They were little dark bluish feliows 
shaped like a cigar, with six legs and no wings. Each 
insect was about one millimeter long, and they clus- 
tered together like aphides (see Figure 12). 

Later we found them under most of the stones near 
the moss, clustering among the whitish roots (or 
hyphze) of the moss. They would be frozen stiff in 
a thin film of ice until one turned the stone into the 
sun. Then the ice would melt, and they would move 
sluggishly about until the sun left them, when their 
damp habitation froze again. I cannot imagine a 
finer example of hibernation, for it looked as if they 
pursued an active life only when a beneficent explorer 
let in a little sunlight on them! There was also a much 
more active reddish insect, so small that one could only 
just see it; but the Gomphocephalus, as the larger blue 
genus is called, was readily visible to the naked eye. 

Nordenskjold has described a wingless mosquito, 
called Belgica, as the largest animal living continuously 
in Antarctica. This is four millimeters long, a perfect 
giant compared with my little Collembola. But since 
Wilkins has shown that all the Graham Land region 
is merely a cluster of islands, and as it is moreover 
mainly north of the Antarctic Circle, I think I may 
perhaps claim for Gomphocephalus the proud record 
of being the largest living Antarctic animal! 

219 


CHAPTER XI 
COMMERCIAL AND POLITICAL ASPECTS 


THE WHALING INDUSTRY 


N Antarctica it would appear that the flag follows 
I the trade. No nation made any definite claim to 
Antarctica until the development of whaling in south- 
ern waters showed that, however poor the land might 
be, here was a very valuable territory. In recent years 
70 per cent of the whale-fishery of the world has taken 
place either near Graham Land or in vicinity of the 
Ross Sea. In this chapter, therefore, these two aspects 
of Antarctica, the commercial and the political, may 
well be considered side by side. 

We owe to Gunnar Isachsen a peculiarly timely ac- 
count of the development of the whaling industry in 
Antarctic waters. (Geographical Review, July, 1929.) 
He points out that there have been four main stages 
in the development of whaling, as we see it to-day. 
The Vikings perhaps first commenced to hunt the huge 
mammal (for it is, of course, in no wise akin to the 
fishes) off the coast of Norway. Possibly they taught 
the craft to the Basques, for we first hear of whaling 
in the tenth century in the Bay of Biscay. In the six- 
teenth century whaling was a brisk industry in the 
north Atlantic, and soon spread to Spitzbergen and 

220 


COMMERCIAL AND POLITICAL: ASPECTS 


Greenland. By this time the nordcaper, the bowhead, 
and the bottlenose whales were all hunted. Early in 
the eighteenth century the second phase of whaling 
commenced when American whalers hunted the sperm 
whale in temperate and tropical oceans. In 1840 there 
were some eight hundred vessels so engaged, mostly 
from New England ports. All these whales were slow 
swimmers and were harpooned from boats. The sperm- 
whale industry had practically died out by 1918. 

Before the end of the eighteenth century there were 
whalers in the Falkland Islands, and we have seen that 
these hardy seamen greatly extended our knowledge of 
the Antarctic Islands south of America. They chiefly 
hunted the right whale, Balena australis. Between 
1804 and 1817 American ships took one hundred and 
ninety-three thousand right whales in southern waters. 
They also took sperm whales (Physeter) and hump- 
backs. This southern whaling lasted through most of 
the nineteenth century, Enderby Brothers being one 
of the best known British companies about 1840. 
When the northern whales were killed off, the Nor- 
wegian and Scotch whalers voyaged to the Weddell 
and Ross seas around 1892-94. The whales, however, 
were found to be chiefly the swift rorquals, which 
could not be taken by the old technique. However, the 
Norwegian, Foyn, had invented the grenade harpoon 
some years earlier and this led to the third phase in 
whaling, beginning in the north about 1886. It reached 
a climax in the north seas about 1905, and here the 
swifter whales again became depleted by 1915. 

22 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


The fourth phase begins about 1904, when Captain 
Larsen returned from his Antarctic experiences with 
Nordenskjold, and founded a whaling company in 
Buenos Ayres. He was very successful in the first 
year and took full ships back to Sandefjord in Nor- 
way. Nowadays the industry is largely concentrated 
in South Georgia, South Orkneys, and South Shet- 
lands. Licenses are issued from the Falkland Islands 
to whaling companies, of which in South Georgia there 
are four Norwegian, two British, and one Argentine. 
In 1923-4 Captain Larsen extended his operations to 
the Ross Sea and successful cargoes have been obtained 
each year from East Antarctica as well as West 
Antarctica. 

A good account of the whaling at Deception Island 
is given by M. C. Lester.t Large floating factories 
leave Norway by the third week in September. They 
call first at Cardiff for coal and then proceed to Mon- 
tevideo where they pick up the whale catchers. These 
are small boats, each manned by a dozen men. There 
are usually three catchers to each “‘factory.’’ Then the 
small fleet proceeds to the Falklands, where the British 
license is obtained, and finally they reached their center 
at Deception Island (latitude 63° S.) about the third 
week in November. Whaling is carried on through- 
out Bransfield Strait and in Belgica Strait down to 
65° S. Shortly after Christmas the whale catchers go 
south to Belgica Strait, where the ice now begins to 
break away. The factories soon move down to Port 
Lockroy at the south end of Belgica Strait, and they 


1 Geographical Journal (London), September, 1923. 
222 


COMMERCIAL AND POLITICAL ASPECTS 


may remain here to the end of the season, about 
merierztht (See Figure 7.) 

Each year the ships concerned in whaling are being 
made bigger and more powerful. Thus the “Sir James 
Clark Ross,’ the factory ship in the Ross Sea, is 12,450 
tons. Even as late as I9II, it seemed impossible to 
us on the “Terra Nova” to get an iron steamer through 
the pack ice, yet these whalers have suffered no disaster 
to date. The Norwegians now have three land stations 
in the Antarctic, eighty-five whale catchers and twenty- 
four floating factories. Some factories do not ap- 
proach land at all, but drag the one hundred foot whale 
right on board for flensing and cutting up. One of 
these boats is said to be 22,000 tons register. 

It is difficult to say how long the industry will last 
under this terrific onslaught. The humpback was the 
chief prey till 1912 as it was the easiest to catch, but 
it is now much less abundant. The blue whale and the 
finback are the mainstays of the Antarctic whaling 
to-day. Last season whale oil worth three and a half 
million dollars was brought back from southern waters. 
The oil sells at about 100 to 150 dollars a ton and 
is used for soap and lubricants and to replace tallow, 
lard, and margarine. The yearly output is still increas- 
ing, and between 1906 and 1927 the following was the 
harvest of oil: South Georgia, 3,830,000 barrels; South 
Shetland (Deception Island), 2,645,000 barrels; and 
Ross Sea, 199,000 barrels. It is stated that twenty 
thousand whales have been killed in the Antarctic seas 
in recent years. Suarez in his report to the League of 

223 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Nations in 1925 gave his opinion that there were not 
more than twelve thousand whales surviving. 

Luckily the world does not now ignore the destruc- 
tion of a valuable international asset. The fees ac- 
cumulating from the whaling licenses in the Falklands 
region have been in part devoted to carrying out re- 
search as to the environment, migrations, and food of 
the whales. We owe to A. C. Hardy a valuable account 
of the scientific work being carried out on the research 
ship “Discovery.” ? This boat is the same which was 
built for Scott’s first expedition and is now (1929-30) 
on loan to the Australian Government for Mawson’s 
new expedition to the Enderby region. 

The whales taken south of the Falkland Islands, 
apart from the right and sperm whales which are only 
occasionally met with, belong to three species. These 
are, as stated above, the two large rorquals, the blue 
and fin whales, and the humpback whale. These are 
all toothless whales, and therefore they feed on surface 
organisms or plankton. These whales separate the 
small shrimps from the water by means of the sieving 
apparatus of baleen plates in the mouth. The destruc- 
tion of whales was particularly rapid during the War, 
for the whale oil was of great importance as a source 
of glycerine; and in the 1915-16 season eleven thousand 
seven hundred and ninety-two whales were killed. 

In October, 1925, the research ship “Discovery” 
sailed with Dr. Kemp as director of research to carry 
out a study of the environment of the whale. Re- 


2A. C. Hardy, “Work of Royal Research Ship Discovery,” 
Geographical Journal, (London), September, 1928. 


224 


COMMERCIAL AND POLITICAL ASPECTS 


search work in South Georgia is revealing data as to 
breeding times, rate of growth, food of whales, and 
the chemical composition of the innumerable samples 
of sea water. Already Mr. Mathews’ work here shows 
that the three South Georgia whales live exclusively 


Fic. 33.—Map oF SouTH GEORGIA SHOWING DISTRIBU- 
TION OF WHALE FOOD. 


Main currents indicated. (After Hardy.) 


on the shrimp, Euphausia superba. A good deal of 
whale-marking with discs is also being done to dis- 
cover the migrations of the whale. 

Mr. Hardy gives a most interesting map of South 
Georgia which showed that almost all the Euphausia 
are concentrated on the northeast side of South 

225 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Georgia (see Figure 33). Immediately at each side 
of the island is a zone some fifteen miles broad very 
poor in plankton (floating organisms), and outside 
this an encircling zone of thick plant plankton, largely 
diatoms of the species Corethron valdivie,* and out- 
side this again is an area of more mixed, but less dense, 
plankton. This curious distribution is largely due to 
the supply of phosphate which wells up from deep 
waters along the west side of the island in response to 
the dominant ocean currents. The diatoms growing 
here are carried round to the sheltered northeast side 
of the island, where there has developed an extremely 
rich area of Euphausia. This is perhaps why South 
Georgia is one of the richest whale-feeding grounds 
in the world. 


POLITICAL REGIONS IN ANTARCTICA 


We have seen already that there are no very well 
defined regions in the Antarctic so far as we know at 
present. There is a general tendency to call that region 
east of the Greenwich meridian East Antarctica and 
that in the other half of the time-circle West Ant- 
arctica. This division links King Edward Land with 
Graham Land and Coats Land, and splits the Ross Ice 
Shelf between the two Antarcticas. The second method 
of subdivision is to use four quadrants, opposite to the 
three southern continents and the Pacific Ocean. The 
third method is to ignore large divisions and discuss 
each region according to the name given by its dis- 


3 Sketches of Corethron and Euphausia (not to scale) appear in 
Figure 31. 
226 


WEST 0° EAST: 
,Bouvef /s 
fo Norway 


FALKLAND 


5 gee 


Fic. 34.—MAP ILLUSTRATING NOMENCLATURE AND RECENT 
ANNEXATIONS. 


Dotted regions show the only areas charted in Antarctica. 
Admiral Byrd claims Marie Byrd Land for the United States. 
This high land is partly separated by a long fiord (along 150° W.) 
from King Edward Land. Carmen Land is probably non-existent. 
Roman figures show number of winters recorded at meteorological 
stations. 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


coverer. This latter is the preferable course. The 
following table illustrates the three methods. It is seen 
at a glance that Mawson’s present expedition has prac- 
tically a terra incogmta in the African quadrant (see 


Figure 34). 


Primary Subdivision |Secondary Subdivision| Tertiary Subdivision 
East Antarctica African Quadrant Enderby Land 


Australian Quadrant | Queen Mary Land 
Adelie Land 
Oates Land 
Victoria Land 


West Antarctica Pacific Quadrant Ross Ice Shelf 
King Edward Land 
Marie Byrd Land 
Peter Island 


American Quadrant Charcot Land 
Graham Land 
Hearst Land 
Leopold Land 
Coats Land 


The cartographer is now faced with yet another set 
of arbitrary boundaries, which is based apparently on 
the fancies of the colonial offices of Britain, France, 
Norway, and the United States. We may rapidly trav- 
erse the events which led up to the first definite procla- 
mation in 1908. 

Captain Cook took possession of South Georgia in 
1775, while Captain Biscoe did the same for Graham 
Land in 1832. Most explorers since have raised the 
flag of their nation and taken possession in the name of 

228 


COMMERCIAL AND POLITICAL ASPECTS 


ime kine or ruler. To quote D. H. Miller (Polar 
Problems), “In early days, the discovery of unknown 
lands was regarded as the primary source of national 
title. But the impossibility that. discovery, without 
anything more should constitute a continuing basis of 
sovereignty soon became obvious, and ‘effective occu- 
pation’ or ‘settlement’ became a requisite. In recent 
years a third element of title has come to be thought 
of internationally as almost necessary, i.e. notification 
of the fact to other Powers.” 

In July, 1908, Letters Patent from the British 
Crown appointed the Governor of the Falkland Islands 
to be Governor of South Georgia, the South Orkneys, 
the South Shetlands, the Sandwich Isles, and Graham 
Land. The territory lay “south of the fiftieth parallel 
of south latitude and between the twentieth and eight- 
ieth degrees of west longitude.” The original limits 
apparently included Tierra del Fuego and other lands 
of Chile and Argentina. But an amended definition 
gave the boundaries shown on the map, which extended 
along the two meridians to the South Pole. Thus the 
Weddell Sea became a British territory. (Figure 34.) 

In July, 1923, a second dependency was constituted 
which places the Ress Sea beneath the Union Jack 
under the jurisdiction of the Governor General of New 
Zealand. Here the sixtieth latitude is the northern 
boundary, the other two being the 160th degree of 
east longitude, and the 150th degree of west longitude. 
In January, 1841, Ross had taken possession of these 
lands on Possession Island near Cape Adare. Sir 
Edgeworth David raised the flag at the South Mag- 

229 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


netic Pole in January, 1909. Shackleton first traversed 
the Polar Plateau in 1908 though Amundsen took pos- 
session of the polar region itself in the name of the 
King of Norway. Supposing valuable minerals are 
discovered at the Pole, it will be an interesting legal 
point as to where the /interlands of the coasts shall 
have their furthest southern limit, if the Pole itself is 
to belong to Norway! It seems a great pity that those 
in authority did not choose 155° E. longitude, instead 
of 160°, as the western boundary of the Ross De- 
pendency. For the Magnetic Pole and all the moun- 
tains discovered by Scott between 79° S. and 83° S. 
are outside this limit. In fact, the most striking fea- 
ture in Antarctica, the great South Victoria Horst 
(see Figure 10), winds east and west across this 
political boundary from Cape Adare to the Pole 

The French Government in March, 1924, has at- 
tached Adelie Land to the Government of Madagascar, 
together with Kerguelen Island and St. Paul and Am- 
sterdam islands. The statement is vague, the region 
being spoken of as “that portion of Wilkes Land 
known as Adelie Land.’’ As mentioned earlier there 
is no unanimity as to what constitutes Wilkes Land. 
We have seen that D’Urville spent only one week in 
East Antarctica or perhaps less time than almost any 
other explorer. He did not land on the main land. 
In view of Mawson’s splendid achievements in cartog- 
raphy and science, and his sojourn during two Ant- 
arctic winters in this region, it seems likely that 
Australia will make out a good case for the British 
claims to Adelie Land, especially as the hinterland 

230 


COMMERCIAL AND POLITICAL ASPECTS 


areas, at the Magnetic Pole, at the head of the Taylor 
Glacier, and in the vicinity of Barne Inlet, have all 
been mapped by British expeditions. 

Norway is the third nation to expand its territories 
in the Antarctic. In November, 1927, the ship “Nor- 
vegia,”’ under Captain Christensen, sighted Bouvet 
Island, that elusive island in the South Atlantic Ocean. 
He fixed its position at 54° 26’ S. and 3° 24” E. 
(see Figure 34). The island is pentagonal in shape 
and about eight kilometers wide. Its snow-clad sides 
rise evenly to a central plateau of about nine hundred 
meters elevation. There was practically no vegetation, 
but the seas teemed with life, and a number of fur- 
seals were killed. The ship stayed there during De- 
cember. In November, 1928, the British waived any 
claims to the island in favor of Norway. In the last 
whaling season (1928-29) the “Norvegia’’ made a 
journey to Peter Island (go° W. and 69° S.) and an- 
nexed it to Norway. This island was the first land 
seen south of the Antarctic Circle, and was discovered 
by the Russian, Bellingshausen, in January, 1821. 
Thus Norway has just taken possession of two of the 
most interesting localities discussed in Antarctic his- 
tory. Perhaps they epitomize Antarctica as a whole. 
Land covered by ice, hard to discover, valueless for 
commerce, but surrounded by richly endowed seas and 
touched with mystery and the romance of the unknown. 


REFERENCES 


CHAPTER I 
The Value of Antarctic Exploration 


[ know of no general account stressing the scientific 
value of polar exploration, though the subject is touched 
upon in most polar books. H.R. Mill’s The Siege of the 
South Pole (London, 1905), is the best introduction to a 
study of Antarctica. Mawson in the Geographical Journal 
(June, 1911), stresses the structural interest. His chap- 
ter in Problems of Polar Research (New York, 1928), 
is very suggestive. The whole of this latter book, in fact, 
should be read by every student. The present writer in his 
With Scott, the Silver Lining (London, 1916), has en- 
deavored to give in popular language some account of the 
many problems tackled by his scientific colleagues and 
himself in the Antarctic. 


CHAPTER IT 
Exploring Antarctic Seas 


The author has turned to original volumes where pos- 
sible. Heawood’s Geographical Discovery (Cambridge, 
1921), is useful. The Siege of the South Pole is excellent 
for an account of exploration up to 1904. The claims of 
Wilkes are discussed by Balch in Antarctica (Philadel- 
phia, 1902). See also J. K. Davis’ With the Aurora 
(London, 1919). The Antarctic Manual, published by 
the Royal Geographical Society (London, 1901), gives 
the logs (or important extracts) of Biscoe, Balleny, 


233 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


Wilkes, D’Urville, Arctowski, and Bernacchi. There are 
many articles in the journals of the older geographical 
societies dealing with these explorations. 


CHAPTER III 
Exploring the Great Continent 


Journals of all the later voyages are available in most 
large libraries. In English are accounts by Cook (1900) 
and Bernacchi (1901), of Gerlache’s and Borchgrevinck’s 
expeditions. The volumes of the great expeditions are 
classic. The Voyage of the Discovery (1905), The Heart 
of the Antarctic (1909), Scott’s Last Expedition (1913), 
and The Home of the Blizzard (1915). I may be par- 
doned for referring to the remarkable series of books 
which describe the 1910-13 expedition with which I was 
associated. Scott’s account appeared in 1913, Priestley’s 
in 1914, Taylor’s in 1916, Evans’ in 1921, Ponting’s in 
1921, and Cherry-Garrard’s in 1923. Levick and Gran 
have also written books thereon. These are, of course, in 
addition to the large volumes on special scientific subjects. 


CHAPTER IV 
Recent Expeditions to the Antarctic 


Filchner’s voyage is described in Petermann’s Journal 
(1913), page.57. Shackleton’s last two voyages are de- 
scribed in books entitled South and the Voyage of the 
Quest. The number of the American Geographical 
Review for July, 1929, contains a valuable article by Sir 
Hubert Wilkins from which I have been permitted to 
quote largely. My account of Commander Byrd’s exploits 
is also mainly based on an article in the Review for April, 
1929. 

234 


REFERENCES 


The Brief History of Polar Exploration by W. L. A. 
Joerg has just been published (1930) by the American 
Geographical Society. It deals especially with exploration 
by flying, and is accompanied by two invaluable maps. 


CHAPTER V 


The Continent; Its Geology and Relation to Other 
Lands 


As regards geology, I hasten to acknowledge my in- 
debtedness to the best single memoir yet produced by an 
Antarctic expedition. I refer to Geology, Vol. I by David 
and Priestley (Heinemann, London, 1914). This deals 
with physiography, glaciology, meteorology, and paleon- 
tology, as well as the usual geological research. Ferrar’s 
account (Discovery Expedition, 1902) is still the founda- 
tion of all stratigraphic work in East Antarctica. Nor- 
denskjold’s volumes (Stockholm, 1910), especially those 
dealing with the fossils, must be consulted. Woodward’s 
account of the Devonian fish (1921) and Seward on the 
Permian ferns (1914) are published by the British 
Museum. 


CHAPTER VI 
Scenery and Topography 


This chapter on topography is based almost entirely on 
the writer’s quarto memoir Physiography of MacMurdo 
Sound and Granite Harbour (Harrison, London, 1922). 
No other expedition has come across such large areas of 
ice-free country, so that no other memoir perhaps deals so 
fully with these problems. I contributed a very lengthy 
paper on the subject to the Royal Geographical Journal 
for October, November, and December, 1914; and I have 


235 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


borrowed one or two maps therefrom. A few illustrations 
are from my book, With Scott. 


CuHapTer VII 
Ice Sheets and Glaciers 


Glaciology is discussed in my large memoir, and I have 
used in this book a number of illustrations therefrom. 
But I am much indebted—as are all Antarctic students— 
to the very fine memoir (Glaciology, Harrison, London, 
1922), produced by my sledge-mates (and _ brothers-in- 
law!) Priestley and Wright. Some data have also been 
taken from the earlier memoir by David and Priestley 
(1914). The textbook by W. H. Hobbs, Characteristics 
of Existing Glaciers (New York, 1911), should be con- 
sulted by all who are interested in glacial erosion. 


CuaptTer VIII 
Oceanography and Sea-Ice 


Oceanography was investigated closely by the German 
expedition under Drygalski. I have used one drawing 
from his chapter in Problems in Polar Research (q.v.). 
I am indebted to the American Geographical Society for 
much data incorporated in their splendid large-scale map 
of the Antarctic (1928). The other references are men- 
tioned in Chapters VI and VII. 


CHAPTER IX 
Climatology 


For the climatology I have used my own chapter in 
Problems of Polar Research. A book of particular 
value concerning the general circulation is Glacial Anti- 
cyclones, by W. H. Hobbs (New York, 1926). I have 

236 


REFERENCES 


referred in many places to the three volumes of meteor- 
ology written by my colleague on the expedition, Dr. G. C. 
Simpson (Calcutta, 1919). Mawson’s brief account of 
aurore (Heart of the Antarctic) has been quoted. 


CHAPTER X 
Flora and Fauna 


The volume on botany produced after Nordenskjold’s 
expedition is important (Stockholm, 1910). Dr. Wilson’s 
very readable account of the Antarctic fauna will be 
found at the end of Voyage of the Discovery, Vol. Il. A 
number of references concerning whaling are mentioned 
im the text. 

CHAPTER XI 


Commercial and Political Aspects 


The journals consulted are referred to in the text. 
There is no book dealing specifically with the commercial 
and political aspects of Antarctica. However, two general 
books which have appeared recently may be referred to. 
They are Polar Regions by Rudmose Brown (London, 
1927), in which, however, most of the space is given to 
Arctic areas; and Antarctica by Gordon Hayes (London, 
1928). The latter is a large volume, marked by contro- 
versial discussions as to the relative merits of various ex- 
peditions. It is by an armchair writer who has apparently 
little belief in the value of detailed scientific research in 
the Antarctic regions, which in his opinion “savours of 
solemn trifling.” As the present writer holds the opposite 
view, he is not much in sympathy with Mr. Hayes’ argu- 
ments, though the latter’s industry has compiled a very 
readable book. 

I have also written a long chapter dealing with equip- 


237 


ANTARCTIC ADVENTURE AND RESEARCH 


ment, etc., for Antarctic travelers in Brouwer’s series 
of Practical Hints for Scientific Travellers, Vol. IV 
(Nijhoff, 1926, The Hague). A special collection of 
books and apparatus is to be seen at the Polar Institute 
attached to the University of Cambridge, England. 


INDEX 


Adams, 46, 47, 48 

Adare, Cape, 33, 53, 94 

Adelaide Island, 22, 45 

Adelie Land, 24, 27, 39, 63, 105, 
230 

Adelie penguins, 215-217 

Admiralty Range, 30 

Ainsworth, 63, 177 

Alaska, I 

Alexander Island, 16, 19, 20, 33, 


Alexandra Mountains, 76 

Alph Lake, 118; River, 210 

Amundsen, 32, 35, 53, 59-61, 178, 
230 

Anderson, 42 

Andes, 10, 89 

Andvord Bay, 73 

Ann, Cape, 22 

Antarctic Circle crossed, 16 

Antarctic discoveries charted, 21 

Antarctica, area of, 2 

Antipodal arrangement, 83-84 

Apposed glaciers, 123, 147 

Archeocyathine, 90, 94-96, 104, 
106 

Arctic climate, 178; flora, 203 

Arctowski, 33, 177 

Armitage, 37 

Arrhenius, 199 

Atkinson, 56, 58, 186 

Atlantic rocks, 102 

Aurora, 6, 198-199 

-AuLord, 63, 72: 172 


| Australia, area, 2; geology, 9; 


discovery, 13; build, 88; tem- 
peratures, 183 


Bage, 65, IQI 

Bagshaw, 73 

Balch, 27, 29, 233 

Balleny Isles, 16, 22, 27, 29, 30, 
72, 233 

Balloon Bight, 34 

Barkow, IgI 

Basalt, 102 

Bathymetry, 159 

Bay ice, 166 

Beacon Sandstone, 65, 81, 90-91, 
96, 96-I0I, III 

Beardmore Glacier, 5, 49-50, 55- 
57-75 72; 90, 95, 98, 134, 
147-148, 156, 192 

Belgica, 190, 219 

Bellingshausen, 19-20, 21, 231 

Bernacchi, 33, 177 

Bibliography, 233-235 

Birds, 210-217 

Biscoe, 21-22, 228, 233; Isles, 44 

Bjerknes, 184 

Blizzards, 187, 189, 193 

Blue Lake, 119 

Bonney Lake, 118, 124 

Borchgrevinck, 32, 33 

Botany Bay, 115 

Bothrio lepis, 98 

Bouvet Isle, 14, 15, 16, 18, 231 

Bowers, 52, 53; Piedmont, 54, 55 

Bransfield, 19 


239 


INDEX 


Brocklehurst, 47 

Brown, 237 

Bruce, 33, 43-44, 178 
Buckley, Mount, 99 

Budd Land, 25 

Bull, 32 

Byrd, 76-82, 178 

Byrd Land, 35, 77, 227-228 


Caird Land, 68 

Cambrian rocks, 90, 95-96 

Canberra museum, I5 

Capes, I15 

Carmen Land, 35, 60, 81 

Carr Cape, 28 

Caves, 117 

Charles Bob Mountains, 81 

Charcot, 44-46; Isle, 46, 76 

Cherry-Garrard, 55, 217, 234 

Chree, 6, 199 

Christensen, 231 

Cirques, I17, 122, 124-127, 134, 
137,.148 

Cirrus drift, 180, 195 

Clerke’s Log, 16 

Chiffse517 

Climate of Antarctica, 7, 11, 
177-199 

Cloudmaker, 148 

Cloven-hoof ice, 168 

Coal, 490, 75, 97-98, I00-I101 

Coats Land, 31, 43, 44, 68, 73, 96 

Colbeck, 33, 38 

Colobanthus, 201 

Confluent Ice, 140, 155 

Continental Ice, 136-137 

Continental Shelf, 84-158 

Cook, 14-19, 228; map, 16 

Cook, Mount, 132-134 

Cope, 72 

Corethron, 205 

Cote Clarie, 25 

Crab-eater seal, 208 

Crane Channel, 75 


Crozet Isle, 82 

Crozier, Cape, 36 
Crystalline limestones, 93 
Cwm. See Cirque. 


Dalrymple, 15, 17 

Darbyshire, 202 

Darwin, 126, 148 

David, Sir Edgeworth, 6, 35, 
46, 47, 50-51, 90-91, 94, 100, 
104, I15, 118, 154, 164, 192, 
229, 235 

Davis Bank, 160 

Davis, J. K., 23, 63-66, 7a;7ee 
173, 233 

Davis, W. M., 85 

Day, 56 

Debenham, 53, 96, 143 

Débris cones, I19-120 

Deception Isle, 45, 73, 74, 222 

Dendritic glaciers, 139, 148 

Denman glacier, 66 

Deutschland drift, 40, 172, 190 

Devil’s Dancing Floor, 79 

Diatoms, 163, 203 

“Discovery,” 34, 82, 224 

Discovery Chart, 21 

Dolerite, 91, 97, 101-102, 106 

Dolphins, 206 

Down-warps, 86-87 

Drake, 13; Loop, 88 

Drygalski, 40-41, 157, 161, 163, 
193; Ice Tongue, 50; I51, 155, 
178 

D’Urville, 23-25, 27, 28 


East Antarctica, 226 

Edward VII Land, 30, 34, 46, 
53, 76, 88, 101 

Eielson, 74 

Elephant Isle, 26, 40, 76 

Emperor Penguins, 55, 212-214 

Enantiomorph, 80 


240 


INDEX 


Enderby Land, 16, 18, 21, 22, 
106, 221 

Endurance Drift, 40, 68-70, 172, 
192 

Epeirogenic, 85 

Erebus, Mount, 30, 46; map, 54, 
102-3; 189, IQI 

Euphausia, 203, 205, 216, 225 

Europe, area, 2 

Hyans, Cape, 53, 113, 110, 103 

Ryans, E. RK. A., 56; 57 

Evans (seaman), 37, 52, 57 

Evolution of life, 10 


Falliere’s Land, 45 

Falkland Islands’ 
227-229 

Fauna, 203 et seq. 

Ferrar, 235; Glacier, 37, 38, 53; 
maps 54, 02, 101, 122, 127,128, 
134, 141-147, 149 

Ferrar Valley, 110 

Ferrel, 162 

Field, Mount, 134 

Filchner, 40, 63, 66-67, 68; Ice 
Shelf, 153, 192 

Finley Isles, 75 

Fish, fossils, 35, 58, 98, 106 

Flight to the Pole, 78-81 

Flora, 200-203 

Foyn’s Land, 33; 221 

7 Etam,” 50 

Framheim, 35, 61 

Franklin, 26, 32 

Frazil, 163 

Fridjof Nansen Mount, 81 

“Furious Fifties,” 108 


Dependency, 


Gaussberg, 25, 41, 66, 106 
Geologie, Pointe, 24 

Geology of Antarctica, 9, 83-107 
Gerlache, 32, 202 

Gjoa, I5 

Glacial erosion, 131-132 


Glacier classes, 135-138 

Glossopteris, 5, 99-100 

Gueiss, 93 

“Golden Period,” 62 

Gomphocephalus, 96, 219 

Gondwanaland, 100 

Gould, 77, 78, 81-82, 88, 98 

Graben, 175 

Graham Land, I9, 22, 31, 2109, 
229 

Gran, 234 

Granite, IOI 

Granite Harbor, 34: map, 54, 92 

Granulites, 93 

Gravity, 6 

Graywacke, 94, 106 

Great Ice Age, 9 

Gregory, 83 

Greeks, 12 

Green, Lowthian, 83 

Greenland, glaciers, 134; cli- 
mate, 179; flora, 202; whaling, 
225 


Hann, 181 
Hanson, 33 
Hardy, 224 
Hayes, 237 
Hayward, 71 
Heard Isle, 82 


.Herbertson Glacier, 148-150 


Hearst Land, 40, 75, 89 
Heawood, 233 
Heiberg Glacier, 78, 81 


Heim, 136 

Hess, 134 

Hobbs, $4, 126, 135, 136, 139, 
194-195, 236 


Hobbs Glacier, 122 

Hooker, 29, 31, 202 

Hope Bay, 42, 104 

Hope, Mount, 48, 148 

Horst of Antarctica, 35, 78, 81, 
88, 91, 96, IOI, 150, 230 


241 


INDEX 


Humboldt, 4 


Icebergs, 157, 170, 174-176 

Ice blink, 110 

Ice divide, 35, 148 

Ice flowers, 164 

Ice foot, 167-170 

Ice sheets, 131 

Ice shelf, 140 

Ice Tongue, 138, 140, 150-153, 
170 

Insects, 218-219 

Isaachsen, 220 


Japanese, 61 


Jensen, 103 

Joerg, 235 

Joinville Land, 23, 69 
Jones, 66 

Jurassic flora, 104-105 


Kemp, 224 

Kenyte, I0I, 102 

Kerguelen, 14, 16, 17, 29, 41, 82, 
230 

Kidson, 182, 184 

Killer-whales, 204-206 

Knox Land, 28 

Koettlitz Glacier, 54, 55, 128, 
146, 175 

Kosciusko, Mount, 132, 135 

Kukri Hills, 145 


Lake Eyre, 112 

Lakes in Antarctica, 116, 1I17- 
II9 

Land-bridges, 8 

Larsen, 32, 42, 222; glacier, 51, 
155 

Lashley, 30, 156 

Laurie Isle, 43 

Lecanora, 203 

Leopold Land, 68 

Lepidodendron, 100 


Lester, 73, 222 

Levick, 215-217 

Lichens, 8, 200, 201 

Little America, 35, 78 

Lister, Mount, 125, 126, 
135, 192 

Liv Glacier, 78, 80, 98 

Loubet Land, 45 

Louis Philippe Land, 23 


134- 


Macintosh, 52, 71 

Mackinley, 81 

Mackay Glacier, 54, 58, 129, 134, 
140 

Macmurdo Sound, 34-35; chart, 
54, OI, 114 

Macquarie Isle, 63, 66 

Madigan, 65 

Magellan, 13, 18 

Magnetic Pole, 4, 5, 24, 29, 50- 
51, 65 

Magnetism, 4 

Mathews, 225 

Markham, Mount, 36 

Marshall, 46, 48 

Marsupials, 8 

Mawson, 22, 46, 63-66, 82, Io, 
176, 198, 233; map, 5, 25 

Mawson Bank, 160 

Mecking, 178 

Meinardus, 193 

Melbourne site, 22 

Mercator, 12, 13 

Mertz, 5, 64, 161 

Metamorphic rocks, 92 

Mill, 233 

Mill Rise, 66 

Miller, 229 

Moraines, 120-122, 143, 160 

Morell Land, 67 

Moss, 144, 200, 219 

Mossman, 173, 177, 189 

Mulock, 38 

Murdoch, 33 


242 


INDEX 


Murray, 46, 218 
Murphy, 8 


Nansen, 83 

Neve, 176 

New Zealand, 17; build, 88; 
Alps, 121; glaciers, 133-134 

“Nimrod,” 46, 170 

Ninnis, 5, 27, 64; Glacier, 151, 
161 

Nivation, 126, 130, 133, 134-135, 
136 

Nordenskjold, 41-43, 202; Shelf, 
75; Tongue, I51 

North Land, 25 

“Norvegia,” 231 

Norwegian whalers, 32 

Nunatak, 127-128 

Nunakol, 127-128, 129 

Nussbaum riegel, 124, 127-128 


Oates Land, 25, 35, 52, 57, 72, 
228 

Oceanography, 157-163 

One Ton Camp, 53, 57, 186 

Outlet Glaciers, 139, 140-148 


Pacific rocks, 102 

Pack ice, I09, 170-172, 174 

Paleozoic rocks, 90 

Palimpsest theory, 127-128 

Palmer, 19, 20, 21 

Pancake ice, 164, 171 

Patience Camp, 69 

Paulet Isle, 42, 69 

Peary, 83, 202 

Penguins, 203, 212-217; fossil, 
105 

Pennell, 176; Bank, 160 

Peter Island, 16, 18, 20, 33, 231 

Peterman Isle, 45 

Petrels, 211 

Piedmont ice, 138, 140 

Pleistocene ice, 8 


Polar front, 182 

Polar Institute, 238 

Polar Plateau, 49, 56-57, 60, 79- 
8I 

Political regions, 226-231 

Ponting, 175, 199, 206, 234 

Port Lockroy, 222 

“Pourguot Pas.” 17,45 

Powell, 19, 23 

Pressure ridges, 167-168; waves, 
196-197 

Prestrud, 61 

Priestley, 46, 58, 94, 95, I15, 
Ei7, EES, 136! 136° 47, 164, 
173; ¥703 295, 226 

Prior, 102, 103 

Ptolemy, 12 


Quebec siege, 14 

Queen Mary Land, 64, 
map, 172 

Queen Maud Range, 78 

“Ouest” 73 


137; 


Racovitzl, 210 

Rasmussen, 202 

Riegel, 123, 125, I41 

Ringgold, 25, 39 

Rockefeller Range, 76 

Rorqual, 206-207, 224 

Ross, 4, 29-31, 156 

Ross Ice Shelf, 30, 33, 34, 48, 
78, 81, 88, 109-110, 116, 134, 
153-156, I61 

Ross Island Tongue, 151-153 

Ross Sea Dependency, 227-229 

Ross seal, 208 

Rotifers, 218 

Rouch, 177 

Royds, 35, 36; Cape, 46, 116 

Ryder, 133 


Sabrina Land, 23 
Sandwich group, 18, 229 


243 


INDEX 


Sastrugi, 38 

Scenery, 108-113 

Scotia, 43; Bay, 173-174 

Scott, Robert Falcon, 34-39, 52- 
58, 99, 152, 154, 163, 186, 198 

Sea-ice, 163-176 

Sea leopard, 207, 216 

Seals, 146, 205-207 

Sequoia, 92 

Seward, 99, 100, 235 

Shackleton, 36, 46-52, 68-72, 73, 


230 

Shackleton Shelf, 28, 153, 160 

Shear-crack, 166-167 

Shields of world, 85-86 

Shores, 114 

Siberia, 180, 181 

Simpson, 59, 177, 183, 186, 187, 
195-197, 236 

Skauk, 152 

Skua, 211 

Smith, 19, 21 

Smith, Grant, 174 

Snowfall, 190 

Snow Hill Island, 41, 91-92, 105, 
190, 202 

Solifluction, 116, 146 

Sonic depth-finder, 158 

South Georgia, 10, 16, 18, 20, 66, 
70, 73, 104, 222, 224, 229 

South Orkneys, 10, 23, 43, 104, 
178, 222, 229 

South Shetlands, 19, 24 

Spencer-Smith, 71 

Staten Isle, 179 

Stefansson Strait, 19, 75 

Structure of A., 84-86 

Suarez, 223 

Suess, Mount, 58, 98, 120, 120 

Switzerland, 9, 124, 135 


Tahiti transit, 15 
Taylor Glacier, 6, 37, 53; map, 
54, 121, 127-128, 134, 141, 192 


Taylor, Griffith, 53, 58, 136, 177, 
200, 206, 200, 219, 233, 235, 
237 

Taylor Valley, 93, 111-112, 116, 
122-124, 190 

Termination Land, 24, 64 

“Terra Nova,” 52, 106, 170 

Tesselations, 146 

Tetrahedral Theory, 83 

Texas area, 2 

Tide-crack, 169-170 

Tierra del Fuego, 13 

Tilley, 93 

Topography, Antarctic, 113-130 

Totten Land, 64 

Transection glaciers, 139 

Tropopause, 181 


Uruguay, 42 


Vahsel, 67, 191 

Value of exploration, I 
Valdivia cruise, 14, 106 
Variation lines, 5 
Victoria Land, map, 35 
Victorian highlands, 150 
Vince, 36 

“Vincennes,” 26 


Wandel Isle, 44 

Water erosion, 129-130 

Webb, 65 

Weddell, 16, 20, 30 

Weddell Sea, map, 40, 67, 82, 
220 

Weddell seal, 208-209 

West Antarctica, 226 

Whales, 204-207 

Whaling, I9, 220-226 

Wild, 46, 48, 63, 65-66, 73; 98, 
17 . 

Wilkes, 23, 24, 25, 26-20 

Wilkes Land, 64, 72, 158, 230, 
233 


244 


INDEX 


Wilkins, Sir H., 7, 19, 73, 74- | World-Plan, 83-88 

76, 177, 219; chart, 40 Wright, 53, 95, 136, 138, 143, 
Wilkins Land, 75 148, 163, 177, 236 
Wilson, 36, 52, 55, 99, 167, 186, 

ines, 210, 212, 213, 214, 1 “Yelcho,” 71 

218, 237 
Winds, 188, 191-196 Zoology, 8, 203-219 
Woodward, 235 (1) 


BOOKS OF POPULAR SCIENCE 


THE EARTH AND ITS RHYTHMS 


By CHARLES SCHUCHERT and CLARA M. LEVENE. A 
thoroughly scientific presentation of geology in all its 
phases, so attractively written that it reads like a ro- 
mance. The authors are of the faculty of Yale Uni- 
versity. Excellently illustrated. 


PRIMITIVE HEARTHS IN THE PYRENEES 


By RutH Otis SAwTELL and IpA TREAT. The story of 
a summer’s exploration in the haunts of prehistoric 
man. The best simple explanation of prehistoric man 
that there is. “A primer of prehistorical research, but 
also a splendid adventure.’—Harper’s Magazine. Illus- 
trated with photographs and charming sketches. 


THE STORY OF THE MOON (Revised Edition) 


By Garrett P. Serviss. This is one of the most 
popular and interesting books on the Moon that has 
ever been written. With the aid of the best photographs 
and the testimony of the greatest telescopes it tells 
exactly what a visitor from the Earth would see and 
experience on the Moon’s surface. This revised edition 
brings the book up to the minute, 


THE SUN (Revised Edition) 
By CuHartes G. Appot. Here a great astronomer 
has told for popular reading what is known of the Sun 
and its relation to the Earth and starry universe in 
general. Illustrated. 


GEOLOGY 
By ALBertT Perry BrIGHAM, revised and extended by 
FREDERICK A. Burt. This simple and entertainingly 
written book has long been a standard popular presenta- 
tion of geology. Professor Burt has brought it up to 
date and added a very valuable section on economic 
geology. There are exceptional illustrations. 


D. APPLETON AND COMPANY 
New York London 


—— 


a ae > 
ye ae —_ 


wg 


eis er 


~~ 
+. 


Ae Et 


fm = 
“ee. 


LEARNERS 
e RN 


Wl AS 


LOLA LS RAEI 


Seas hs a 


ayes 
SS NPA 
x . MONS 

Se es SOS NASA 
NSANAAAS NENA SA a NSN SARANALE NERA SERED AS . 
WS S SSS 

™ . PASS ANN 
SIIVS 

IN 


anaes wah ss 


ks . 
a 
SN 


seheah Aes aes 
* . SNS 
SOS 
SSN 

SAIS 


SASS 
sase sass. 


a 
SESS 
ANS coe 
ATS ARRAN 
SS MAAN Woes 


Ry 


ee, 


x 
OO 


Ss 
SESE NSS 
Aaa 


SA 


See 


aa 


SASS Se 
SPUN SEES 
NONI SNS . REA 


SENS S SANS SE ‘ Sh 
SSN : : SN 


. ‘ ~ 
WIA 


Neccen 


ere 


oS, 


SEN 
SNS 

TERN : x a 
SS NS N . RRS AVAY SAN 


EVANS 


SEAS “ 


RAS 
SORA 


\ 
: TN. 
SSAA 


AN SY 
NS SS N SAY 
ESS : SA 


Sn 


Soy RON 


a 

: 

SSR 

RRR RRR MN 
. S 


4 SS 


Soe =A \ ‘ 
WANN 
LAIMA RATT " WAS 


ELT RAILSLV By SIAN 
. 


— 
aS 


SNS 


SEA 
SSO aa 


BERENS 
TRAE 


ENN 
BORA 


eee eA SN 
Seen 


SO. 
NSS RS 
SIN SS SNS 
ES, Ws SSS 
. . ~